JP7054030B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

Currently, the most popular pachinko gaming machines are called "special symbols" (or main gaming symbols) on the display such as 7-segment machines when a gaming ball enters the start chucker. When the symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state {a large winning opening that is normally closed. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which (a so-called attacker) opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The symbol to be displayed is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode.

Here, since this mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the above-mentioned design. The focus is on whether to grant.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-119871

For example, there has been a conventional effect (so-called right-handed effect, left-handed effect, etc.) instructing the player to determine the strength of the firing intensity according to the progress of the game, but the effect is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, there is a problem that further improvement is needed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting port located in a predetermined game area and
A game ball that flows down on the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down on the first area side.
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
Information display unit that can display information and
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the information display on the information display unit.
The main game club
When the ball enters the starting port, the special symbol change display is executed on the special symbol display device.
A special game can be executed when the special symbol of a predetermined mode is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device.
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side or the second region side, and send it to the sub-game unit.
The sub-game club
Equipped with a game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the recommended launch information received by the game information receiving means, the first notification image and the game ball, which are game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side, are launched toward the second region side. It is configured to be controllable so that the information display unit displays the second notification image, which is the game information that can be notified.
The main game unit recommends firing at least once after the variable display of 1 special symbol is started and before the variable display of the special symbol performed after the variable display of 1 special symbol is started. Generate information and send it to the sub-game department
The recommended launch information is composed of a combination of two command data, and one of the two command data is configured to be generated using flag data indicating a predetermined game state.
The flag data is configured to be operating data when a predetermined game state has occurred.
The pachinko game is characterized in that the sub-game unit can be controlled to display the second notification image on the information display unit when the recommended launch information, which is the operation data of the flag data, is received. It is a machine.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that the effect can be easily understood by the player when the effect of instructing the player to determine the strength of the firing intensity is executed.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of initial processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the first suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the second suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of initial processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the second suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the firing instruction display unit control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a configuration diagram of a main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a configuration diagram of a main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is an example of the content of the launch instruction command on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a special gaming effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a right-handed image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of a left-handed image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine in charge of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a configuration diagram of a main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the game assist effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the special in-game notification image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of a special gaming notification image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the standby demo display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a standby demo image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the notification image confirmation process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a right-handed image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the left-handed image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a right-handed warning display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the left-handed warning display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the standby demo display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a standby demo image FIG. 2 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the movable body accessory drive control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 84 is an example of a notification image instruction command in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 85 is an image diagram of an accessory avoidance notification image in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a broadcast image image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which no prize ball is paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is the main control board. It is the identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (designation)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal display, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop and notice, or these. The combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, hard as a random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, but at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is referred to as one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, or a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, the opening period of the variable member is long, the probability of winning the opening of the variable member is high, the time for notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. The "expected average execution time of the easy-to-enter ball game per unit time" assumes a situation in which the symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is constantly changed (for example, a situation in which a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol always exists). In the case, it means the ratio occupied by the opening period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example. , When a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operating state / non-operating state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. High or low probability (so-called high-probability state / low-probability state), length of fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called normal-figure fluctuation shortening function non-operating state / operating state), It is realized by any one or a plurality of combinations such as.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are It is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions between the first main game side and the second main game side, conditions between the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, time reduction game and non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is exemplified so as to be, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured so as to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and changes is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate. The time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on, the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be on, the main game time reduction flag, and the main game time reduction flag. It may indicate a state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on. The time shortening game state including the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on may indicate that the opening time extension function is operating. The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a high-probability lottery state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a low-probability lottery state.

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting a game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball plate D20 and the lower ball plate D22, and sound effects according to the game state and the like are output.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20 (or sometimes called distribution winning opening C20), 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, An auxiliary game symbol display device H20, a center decoration D38, and an out port D36 are installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so as to be easily guided to the first main game starting port A10 by a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown), but not to be guided to the second main game starting port B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10 by a plurality of game nails, windmills, and the like (not shown), while the second main player. It is configured so that it can be easily guided to the game start port B10. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right side and the left side, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 are arranged. The first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port A10 and the second main game start port are arranged so as to overlap the two main game start ports B10 in the vertical direction, or the entrance is shared and the distribution mechanism is provided inside. B10 and B10 may be arranged side by side. Further, in addition to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10, it is also possible to separately provide a third main game start port corresponding to either the first main game or the second main game. be.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. In the present embodiment, the electric accessory that is opened when the auxiliary game symbol stops at the hit symbol (in the present embodiment, since it is provided at the second main game start port B10, the second main game start The mouth electric accessory (referred to as B11d) is provided at the second main game start port, but may be provided at the first main game start port and the third main game start port described above (then). In this case, the electric accessory may be referred to as a first main game start port electric accessory or a third main game start port electric accessory).

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area). ) Is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 {however, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is not limited to this. Also, it may be configured so that it can be easily guided to the left auxiliary game start port provided separately in addition to the auxiliary game start port H10}.

Next, above the out opening D36 (particularly, the right side of the game area D30), the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided, and the right side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area). The game ball flowing down the reference) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning slot corresponding to the main game, which is located above D36 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, the advance state in which the plate-shaped member provided in the large winning opening protrudes in the direction of blocking the opening of the large winning opening and the retracted state in which the plate-shaped member is retracted to the opposite side are adopted. A mode to obtain (a so-called slide-type attacker, in which the large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member capable of receiving a game ball protruding from the game area D30 and flowing down the game area D30, and is in an advanced state. The large winning opening is closed due to the obstruction of acceptance of the game ball by the box-shaped member, and when the box-shaped member is in the retracted state, the acceptance of the game ball by the box-shaped member is permitted. The winning opening may be open), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the opening D36 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). A mouth solenoid C23), a specific area C22, and a specific area entry detection device C22s are provided. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Further, the specific area entry detection device C22s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the specific area C22, and generates specific area entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by either the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s or the specific area entry detection device C22s. Next, the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second major winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second major winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easily won. Make it variable (excite the 2nd prize opening solenoid C23 to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. The above-mentioned slide type attacker may be used without limitation. Further, although not particularly shown in this example, a valve-shaped displacement is performed in a first position where the game ball is easy to enter in the specific area C22 and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter in the specific area C22. A shielding member may be provided (in that case, the opening / closing mode of the shielding member may be different depending on the jackpot symbol).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display a maximum of four holding numbers (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held). Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Low-speed blinking, Number of Holds 3: Medium-speed blinking, Number of Holds 4: High-speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect described later is used. A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations that imitate a game of a slot machine. It has a decorative symbol display area SG11 and a display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four graphic image displays, and the hold display by the graphic image is linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of holdes on the auxiliary game side. Although not shown, it is possible to display the display related to the auxiliary game symbol and the display related to the auxiliary game symbol hold on the effect display device SG.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall gaming operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). The main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the effect control means (sub-main control unit,) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. SM (sometimes called a sub-main board), sub-sub control unit (sometimes also called a sub-sub board) SS that mainly executes production display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and winning prizes in each winning opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a payout unit KE10 or the like that pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20, and a prize ball payout that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10. The control board KH, the launching device D42 that launches the game balls (reservoir balls) of the upper ball plate D20 one by one to the game area D30, the launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and the pachinko gaming machine. A power supply unit E for supplying power to each part, a power switch Ea for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the gaming side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the sound from the speaker D24. The sub-control board S that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc. (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) and these. It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including a control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It also has two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information in the event of a power failure. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps measuring the current time by the built-in power supply.

Here, the real-time clock RTC is a device (integrated circuit) for measuring time, which is provided on the substrate of the sub-main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a separate power supply (battery) independent of the power supply to the CPU on the board, and it is set at the time of shipment from the factory because it continues timing even when the power supply to the gaming machine is not performed. It is possible to supply the current date and time based on the date and time. However, since the real-time clock RTC is measured by the vibration of quartz like a general crystal clock, it is affected by the vibration and low temperature / high temperature, and it is per day for each gaming machine equipped with the real-time clock RTC. An error of about 0.3 to 2.0 seconds may occur.

Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, first. 1 big prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning opening detection device (not shown, the general winning opening is always open regardless of whether or not a special game is executed. In addition, there is a prize ball, but it is an entry port that does not perform a design lottery, etc.)}, a drive solenoid (the above-mentioned first major winning opening solenoid C13, second major winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED Game peripherals (not shown), which are input / output devices essential for the progress of the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared in the figure) It is electrically connected to the peripheral device C and the auxiliary game peripheral device H), and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the prize ball payout control board KH can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of the game ball, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for lending the game ball to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In this embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated from the gaming machine and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the gaming ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and a drive device for other effects (not shown, but a so-called effect). It is connected to the motor, solenoid, etc. of the movable body accessory. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be used. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when the VDP integrated with the voice control circuit is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H). It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes the image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), the speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of ROMs and RAMs to be used, elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

The scope of the present patent claim and the "random numbers" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" (2-byte random numbers) assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255" (1 byte random number) and "0" to "999". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like.

In addition, the limited frequency is predetermined after a specific symbol (a symbol such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol that the special electric accessory will operate) is stopped and displayed, and the operation of the special electric accessory is completed. The type and / or selectivity of the variation mode of the main game symbol during the period (the period may be multiple) is to change, and the state (limited) in which one variation or more is controlled in the predetermined period described above. Frequency state) is shown. Further, the lottery table for determining the variation mode referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as a limited frequency table, and the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, and the previous time. The limited frequency table to be referred to is switched according to the type of the specific symbol that triggered the operation of the special electric accessory and the number of changes of the main game symbol after the end of the special game. Further, the state of referencing the limited frequency table A (also referred to as the limited frequency A state) is switched to the state of referencing the limited frequency table B (also referred to as the limited frequency B state), and the limited frequency table A is referred to. It is limited to switch from the state of being in the state of referring to the limited frequency table B via the state of using the common variable mode determination lottery table commonly used in the current gaming state (normal state). It is said that the frequency state changes. It should be noted that the limited frequency state is configured to be configured to have a plurality of limited frequency states even in one gaming state, and the limited frequency state may be configured to transition a plurality of times in one gaming state. When determining the variation mode of the main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table, the selection rate of the variation mode is different with reference to the common limited frequency table (that is, the variation mode itself to be selected is A method such as the same method (or a method in which the selection rate is different) (or a method in which a variation mode to be selected and a variation mode in which the selection rate is the same but a further fixed value is added to the fluctuation time value related to the selected variation mode). ) May be adopted.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) for managing first and second main game symbol fluctuations that can be cleared to zero. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the drive (opening) time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. There is. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number and a time reduction number counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Further, it refers to an auxiliary game time-saving gaming state (open extension state) relating to the second main game start port electric accessory (sometimes referred to as an ordinary electric accessory).

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Further, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of changes of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Even if the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has, for example, a function of performing a transition lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability-changing game or a time-shortening game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol changes. Good (in the case of a so-called pachinko machine with a fall lottery function).

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include the first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner in the result of the game. It is related to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a special game transition, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers a special game transition, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in the closed state during normal games, and are in the open state under predetermined conditions during special games (big hits). It also has a second big winning opening C20 and a second big winning opening C20 that is closed during a normal game and opened under a predetermined condition during a distribution game.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying the decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying the main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. It should be noted that it may be configured to control another peripheral device via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 4 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of the figure (a) is executed. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial settings are made (not shown, the registers are initialized, the input / output ports are set, etc.), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to RAM. The input port of the clear button is confirmed, and whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E is operated, that is, the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM is performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. Determine if it is. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information that is available). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal in step 1010, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure. Various information commands of the above are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the commands may be set at the relevant timing and described later. It may be configured to be transmitted by the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After executing the process of step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. .. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1910, the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize opening in which the game ball has won a prize. The payout control board KH is made to execute, and the process for managing the result, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1920, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an output process of an external signal (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, or the like). Next, in step 1930, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the processing that was being executed.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPU MC of the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing shown in FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. .. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection command, which is information that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10 is detected. , Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of setting the random number together with the information on the number of hold, and the next process (process of step 1200). Move to. In the case of No in step 1102 and step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) and sets the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol. With reference to, the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, it is compared with the case where it is off. The winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the winning symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1, D2", the opening mode is (opening → closing for 0.2 seconds). Further, in the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed) and stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). In the case of non-time reduction game (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off), the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0", and during the time reduction game (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on). The stop symbol is configured so that the winning / failing lottery table for the auxiliary game is different in each game state so that the hit symbol “D1” is likely to occur (whether or not the auxiliary game probability change function is activated).

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol change time to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-H based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 5.5 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, updates the reserved information recorded in the RAM area of the main control board M, and updates the reserved game symbol. After starting the variation management timer MP11t-H, the variation display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag.

Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit” (D1 and D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the open mode (for example, in the case of the hit symbol "D1" in the time shortening game) based on the hit symbol and the game state on the auxiliary game side. Is open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed. The opening mode (opening mode of opening → closing for 4.0 seconds) is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and then opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the opening time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Determine if the time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and is in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. The flag for opening the electric accessory is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the next process is performed. (Processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable). By controlling in this way, it is possible to provide a sufficient time for the player to visually recognize that the missed symbol "D0" has been missed in the auxiliary game when the missed symbol "D0" is stopped. In addition, since the display of the hit symbol continues while the electric accessory is operating, when the hit symbol is stopped, the stop display fixed time is shorter than when the off symbol is stopped, or there is no stop display fixed time. By doing so, it is possible to smooth the progress of the game.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the first main game start port entry ball information from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M is information that the entry of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10 is detected. The ball detection command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930).

Next, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the acquired information (hold generation command) related to the first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930).

Next, in step 1322, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start opening ball entry information from the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s of the second main game start opening B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the CPUMC of the main control board M is information that the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10 is detected. The ball detection command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930).

Next, in step 1326, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a win / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination random number. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1330, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1332, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the acquired information (hold generation command) related to the second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). If No in step 1302 and 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322, and if No in steps 1322 and 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

In the present embodiment, the information related to the acquired random number is transmitted as the information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1312 and 1332. For example, the information of the random number value or the main game symbol is transmitted. It may be transmitted with a hold number, and it is also possible to substitute this information as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol). (Even if) is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol, but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and simultaneous parallel of both main game symbols). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lot).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol corresponding to the current processing is held (first main game symbol display). In the case of processing, it is a condition that the first main game is on hold). Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1423, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, a variable fixed time of about 500 ms (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, and the variable start condition of the next fluctuation is not satisfied during the variable fixed time. , It may be configured to move to the next process after the variable fixed time (for example, this process can be achieved by performing the branch process by using the variable fixed time flag and the timer). By controlling in this way, it is possible to provide a sufficient time for the player to visually recognize that the missed symbol has been missed in the main game when the missed symbol is stopped. Since the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) continues to be displayed during the big hit (or small hit), when the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) is stopped, it is better than when the missed symbol is stopped. It is also conceivable to smooth the progress of the game by shortening the variable fixed time or eliminating the variable fixed time.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the current symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read out, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and each of the storage areas of the remaining reserved information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. , The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, the process related to the change of the game state {probability fluctuation game state, time reduction game state (main game time reduction flag on / off, auxiliary game time reduction flag on / off)} is not performed ( Although the so-called small hit) is not illustrated, it may be configured so that a small hit occurs (a small hit is won).

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). Based on the game symbol win / fail lottery result and the symbol lottery random number of the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number), the stop symbols related to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Remember.

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds and the opening pattern of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol are as follows: 4A is an 8 round short opening jackpot, 4B is a 16 round short opening jackpot, 5A / 5B is an 8 round long opening jackpot, and 7A. And 7B is a 16-round long open jackpot. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}. Here, short opening / long opening can be realized by different opening times of the large winning openings (first large winning opening C10 and / or second large winning opening C20) per round, for example. In the case of short opening, the game ball is opened only for a very short time (for example, 1.8s to 4.0s) so that one to three balls can enter, while in the case of long opening, it is opened for a long time (for example). , 30s) It is possible to exemplify opening (however, it is also possible to make the upper limit of the number of balls to be entered into the large winning opening per round different. For example, in the case of short opening, the upper limit of the number of balls can be entered. On the other hand, in the case of long opening, the maximum number of balls to enter = 10 etc.).

Further, as will be described later, a special game execution round (1) including a mode in which the large winning opening is opened only for a minimum time (for example, 52 ms to 700 ms) such that the game ball enters 0 to 1 ball. At least one ball can be entered during the round). By carrying out the opening period of the minimum time in the round in which the second big winning opening is opened, it may be controlled to execute a round that does not assume the entry into the specific area C22, and it is controlled as such. In this case, it is preferable to open the shielding member C22c so that the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 even if the game ball enters during the opening period, and to configure the inside of the large winning opening. .. In addition, during the special game, the balls (number of prize balls, effective number of balls entered) acquired during the special game are cumulatively displayed on the effect display device SG for each round or for each round that has been started / executed. May be good. Further, the number of shots and the number of payouts are substantially increased when the game ball is continuously fired in a round in which only a short opening (for example, the above-mentioned opening in the minimum time) is executed. If it is not expected, the number of rounds that will not be a long open (a round that executes an open mode that allows the maximum number of balls to be entered) that has already been executed during the special game, or the number of balls that have been won in the long open round. Only may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize how many rounds have been executed in which the player can substantially obtain a ball. In addition, during the special game, it is necessary to execute the notification of the round (round including long opening) where it is easy to get the ball to be executed and the notification of the round where it is easy to get the executed ball in all the special games. However, for example, it may be configured to be executed only during the special game at the time of the first hit (the big hit won in the non-probability variable game state and the time shortened game state), or the special game related to the first main game side. The presence or absence of execution may be different depending on the special game related to the second main game side, and the effect control state (effect mode, stay) controlled by the CPU on the sub control board S side instead of the main control board M side. The presence or absence of execution may be different depending on (sometimes referred to as a stage).

Next, in step 1410-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. ), And the variation mode of the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is determined based on the lottery random number, and these are mainly controlled. It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the board M, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is configured so that it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is short. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that it may be configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls. not. Further, it may be configured so that the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side is relatively long in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) {the symbol on the second main game side. When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, the second main game side is likely to be put on hold by lowering the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}. In addition, in the period corresponding to the predetermined period as the limited frequency described above, the fluctuation time of the symbol is determined using the limited frequency table.

Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. The command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Will be sent to). Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c by 1. Next, in step 1456, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining probability variation) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1462. On the other hand, even if No in step 1452 or step 1456, the process proceeds to step 1462.

Next, in step 1462, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1462, in step 1464, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1466, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1466, in step 1468 and step 1470, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1462 and step 1466, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). In this embodiment, since the time-reduced game state on the main game side and the time-reduced game state on the auxiliary game side are synchronized, the auxiliary game side is based on the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c on the main game side. When the time reduction game state of the main game side and the auxiliary game side are not synchronized, the time reduction number counter of the auxiliary game side is separately provided so that each can be independently controlled. You may manage it.

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag (the flag for operating the accessory continuous operation device that continuously operates the special electric accessory) is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time saving flag, auxiliary game time saving flag). Next, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1508, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). The description of FIG. 12 in the present embodiment is an example of a gaming machine not equipped with a small hit, and a small hit (a hit in which the condition device is not activated and the special electric accessory is activated), which is a special game, is won. If this is the case, the main game probability change flag and the main game time reduction flag are not turned off, and the probability change number counter MP51c and the time reduction number counter MP52c are not cleared, and only the control for turning on the special game transition permission flag is executed.

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1930), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If No in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910).

Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a round in which the number of rounds executed in the special game is the distribution game execution round (the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened). , In this example, it is determined whether or not the 2nd R and the 4th R) have been reached. In the present embodiment, the two rounds that are not continuous with the second R and the fourth R are the rounds related to the opening of the second large winning opening C20, but this is a round in which the game ball can flow down during the special game. If the game is stored in a specific place in the game area D30 (so-called jamming), the player is asked to play the game again in the second big winning opening C20 (or the specific area C22). The purpose is to provide an opportunity for the ball to enter {whether or not the gaming state after the special game becomes the probability fluctuation gaming state is whether or not the ball can enter the second major winning opening C20 (or the specific area C22). This is important because it is determined by.}. Further, in the present embodiment, two rounds related to the opening of the second large winning opening C20 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a larger number of rounds are related to the opening of the second large winning opening C20. May be.

In the case of Yes in step 1614, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1640.

On the other hand, if No in step 1614, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1616, that is, immediately before the start of each round, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes). Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d to open the first special winning opening C10, and the special gaming timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer). Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1626. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1626 without performing the processes of steps 1618 to 1624.

Next, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and whether or not there are a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls in the first large winning opening C10 in the round. Is determined. If Yes in step 1628, the process proceeds to step 1632. On the other hand, if No in step 1628, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special gaming timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening. Determines whether or not has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1630, the process proceeds to step 1632. If No in step 1630, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910).

Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops driving the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first special winning opening C10 and closes the first special winning opening C10. Next, in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special gaming timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown).

Next, in step 1640, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). .. In the case of Yes in step 1640, in step 1642, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1644, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the special game is ended (special game end display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1910). Even if No in step 1640, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 13 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1652, that is, when the distribution game is being executed, the process proceeds to the process related to the end determination of the distribution game after step 1666.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 (distribution winning opening C20) for a long time by the stop symbol that triggered the special game. It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined jackpot symbol (in this example, 5A, 7A or 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1654, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 (for example, opening for 15 seconds and playing to the specific area C22). The opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20, which facilitates the entry of the ball) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1660. At this time, as the operation pattern of the shielding member arranged in the vicinity of the specific area C22, the residual ball flow time considering the flow time of the game ball in the large winning opening is 15 seconds + the game ball entering the large winning opening is large. It is a time for ensuring that the ball is discharged to the winning opening side, for example, a mode in which the game ball is allowed to enter the specific area C22 from the start of the opening operation of the large winning opening (for example, described above). It operates in the first position). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1654, that is, when the jackpot symbol is 4A or 4B, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M is short including the minimum opening of the second major winning opening C20 having the specific region C22. Opening pattern, for example, opening for 0.052 seconds (starting opening of the flow path to the specific area C22 by the shielding member) → closing for 5 seconds (during this time, the flow path to the specific area C22 is blocked by the shielding member) → 4 seconds. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20, which is opening (the closing time after the last opening is not provided) and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area C22, is set, and the process proceeds to step 1660. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears (zero clears) the value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1662, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game executing flag. Next, in step 1664, the distribution game execution control means MP36 starts opening the second special winning opening C20 according to the opening pattern set in the above process. Even if it is a special game related to a symbol corresponding to a short opening pattern, it is possible to pass through the specific area C22 at the time of subsequent opening without performing shielding control by the shielding member during the period when it is closed once. Even if the opening of the big winning opening is a disadvantageous pattern in appearance, the game ball actually enters the specific area C22 due to the opening of the shielding member, which is an advantageous state after the end of the special game ( It may have a reverse reversal short opening pattern (a short opening pattern advantageous to the player) that performs control to be controlled by the probability fluctuation gaming state).

Next, in step 1666, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. .. In the case of Yes in step 1666, in step 1670, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. On the other hand, if No in step 1666, in step 1668, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1668, the process proceeds to step 1670 and the second big winning opening C20 is closed. Next, in step 1672, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long release flag. Next, in step 1674, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game executing flag.

Next, in step 1676, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1676, in step 1678, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag and proceeds to step 1680. On the other hand, even if No in step 1676, the process proceeds to step 1680. Next, in step 1680, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to (increments) the value of the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1640). do. Even if No in step 1668, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1640).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the probabilistic transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the probabilistic transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability variation number counter MP51c to the number of fluctuations (for example, 150) of the main game symbol in which the probability variation game state continues. Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the time reduction counter MP52c to change the number of changes in the main game symbol in which the time reduction game state continues (particularly, when the time reduction game state is set during the probability variation game state). Is the same value as the value set in the probability variation number counter MP51c, for example, 150) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1714. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the number of times the main game symbol changes (particularly, the stochastic game state does not occur) in which the time reduction game state continues to the time reduction counter MP52c. It is a time-reduced gaming state, for example, 100) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1714.

The number of fluctuations is not limited to this, and the number of fluctuations in the time-reduced gaming state given in the probability-variable gaming state may be larger than the number of fluctuations in the probability-variable gaming state. That is, after the end of the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, the transition to the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state may be made. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won in the probability fluctuation gaming state, the time shortening gaming state continues even after that, that is, the advantageous state for the player continues for a certain period of time. Therefore, it can be a user-friendly gaming machine.

Next, in steps 1714 and 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1910).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 24. First, FIG. 16 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2050, the sub-main control unit SM executes the initial processing described later. Next, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM permits execution of interrupt processing. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (e) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (e) is executed, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the first suggestion effect execution control process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the second suggestion effect execution control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the launch position notification control process described later. Next, in step 2020, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this iterative process routine. do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2100 to S2700 and S2020) are looped after the reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (f). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a command input port from the main control board M side. Check (the input port of the data signal line mentioned above). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM of the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt process. Return to the processing that was being executed.

Next, the process of FIG. 3 (g) is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure when the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like receives the power failure signal. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, in step 2016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts supplying standby power to the evacuation region. Next, in step 2018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits the execution of the interrupt process and shifts to the power interruption waiting loop. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM is provided with an area to which the standby power is automatically supplied even after the power is cut off (or a RAM to which the standby power is automatically supplied is provided), and the game-related information is provided in the area. It may be configured to be stored in.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of initial processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the information stored in the save area (particularly, the game-related information), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2002). ..

On the other hand, if No in step 2052, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not various information commands from the main control board M side have been received. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the information (particularly, game-related information) stored in the save area, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2002). ..

On the other hand, if No in step 2056, that is, if neither RAM clear information nor various information commands have been received from the main control board M side, the process proceeds to step 2052 until the command is received from the main control board M side. , Step 2052 and step 2056 are executed.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S newly acquires a command set related to the occurrence of a new hold (information that can identify the number of holds related to the first main game and the second main game) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the information related to the random value obtained, the information to be used for the preliminary determination, etc.) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing hold counter (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). 1 ”is added. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S obtains hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the above, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

As for the configuration related to the command related to the occurrence of a new hold, the upper (4 bits) is the number of holds on the first main game side, and the lower (4 bits) is the number of holds on the second main game side. The first main game is compared with the received number of holds on the first main game side and the second main game side, which is collectively transmitted to the board S side and stored on the sub-control board S side. It may be configured to determine that a new hold has occurred to the person whose hold number has changed between the hold number on the side and the hold number on the second main game side. Further, the information regarding the number of holdes received on the sub-control board S side is compared with the information on the number of holdes stored on the sub-control board S side, and the number of holdes on the first main game side and the number of holdes on the second main game side are compared. If the number of holds changes by 2 or more in total with the number of holds, the look-ahead effect being executed may be canceled, or a look-ahead lottery may be performed for the hold related to the command that triggered the change of 2 or more. It may be configured not to be performed (because it cannot be determined whether or not the information not stored as a random number in the sub-control board S is a hit or whether or not it is a super reach). In addition, in such a configuration, if a random number value or look-ahead information is received without receiving the number of reserved balls due to a command communication failure or the like, it is stored in the temporary save storage area and held for the next time. It may be configured to memorize the command related to the occurrence when it is received normally. If the amount of change in the number of holds is 1 or more for the number of holds on the first main game side and the number of holds on the second main game side, the command regarding the occurrence of the hold received this time (and the previous time) is Since it is not possible to determine whether the hold is related to the hold of the first main game side or the hold of the second main game side, in such a case, the hold related to the command related to the hold occurrence received this time (and the previous time) is held. May be configured not to execute the look-ahead lottery. Dummy data may also be stored for random number information related to each of the hold related to the command related to the hold occurrence received this time and the previous time. If the dummy data is stored in any of the holds in the hold, the look-ahead lottery is not executed for the hold that occurred in the transition, and all the holds in which the dummy data is stored are exhausted. A look-ahead lottery may be executed for a hold that occurs thereafter.

On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the hold information related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS to hold the drawing on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13). The hold display lamps having the same number as the counter value are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). If No in step 2108, the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the first suggestion effect execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-reduced / probability-variable gaming state.

In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a first suggestion effect execution flag (as will be described later, a flag that is turned on when a hold that satisfies a predetermined condition occurs. Under the situation where the flag is on, it is determined whether or not (an image suggesting or notifying the existence of a hold satisfying the predetermined condition) is off.

In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has whether or not a new hold on the second main game side (hereinafter referred to as a second main game hold) has occurred (in other words, the first). Of the hold on the main game side and the hold on the second main game side, whether or not the hold on the main game side to be preferentially digested has occurred) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, when the symbol change is performed at the present time, the change (currently executed change) is a short open jackpot (second big winning opening). Since the C20 is a big hit that performs an opening operation including opening for a minimum time, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22, and it is difficult to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the special game related to the big hit is completed. In other words, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation is such that the jackpot is scheduled to shift to the non-probability variable gaming state after the special game related to the jackpot is completed. The short-open jackpot may be referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot.

In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is undigested based on the hold information (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number, the symbol determination random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. The result (and the type of stop symbol) of a certain second main game hold (including the new second main game hold) is determined in advance. Next, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not have a hold that is a short-open jackpot among the holds that are digested before the new hold (second main game hold) based on the preliminary determination result. Judge whether or not.

In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is determined that the new second main game hold is a long-open jackpot (because the second jackpot C20 is a jackpot that opens for a long time). It is easy to enter the specific area C22, and it is certain that the game will shift to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game related to the jackpot. In other words, the probability-variable game after the end of the special game related to the jackpot. Determine if the hold is a big hit) that is scheduled to transition to the state. In the case of Yes in step 2214, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the first suggestion effect trigger hold lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Next, in step 2218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first suggestion effect trigger hold lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2218, in step 2220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S gives the new hold (second main game hold) the information that the first suggestion effect trigger hold is held, and the sub-control board S Store in the RAM area of. Next, in step 2222, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the first suggestion effect execution flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). The long open jackpot may be referred to as a probabilistic jackpot.

On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in other words, if there is a first suggestion effect trigger hold that is a hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, in step 2224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is currently the first. Judgment whether or not it is the end timing of the change related to the suggestion effect trigger hold (determine whether or not it is the end time of the symbol change at the time of hold digestion to which the information indicating that the first suggestion effect trigger hold is given). .. In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a first-length open suggestion image (an image notifying that if a big hit occurs while displaying the image, a probable change big hit is obtained). Set the command and move to the next process (process of step 2300).

Here, as shown in the image diagram below the figure, the first long opening suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the characters (in this example, "If you hit a big hit during this effect, a long opening big hit!" If the combination of decorative symbols that becomes a big hit is stopped and displayed while the image is being displayed by a character) or the like, it is configured to be able to notify that a probable change big hit (not a non-probable change big hit). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to execute the notification by voice (or to execute the notification by image and voice at the same time).

On the other hand, if No in step 2202, in step 2228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the first long open suggestion image. Next, in step 2230 and step 2232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the information that the first suggestion effect trigger is held from the hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and at the same time. The first suggestion effect execution flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Even if No in step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2228.

With this configuration, in the first suggestion effect execution control process, since the first long open suggestion image is displayed, the player can recognize that the probabilistic jackpot has occurred thereafter. However, it is an indispensable execution condition to make a preliminary judgment of the hit / fail judgment result (and the type of the stop symbol) of the undigested hold (in this example, especially the second main game hold). As will be described later, in the second suggestion effect execution control process, it is possible to produce the same effect without performing this prior determination). Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a condition for generating the first suggestion effect trigger hold, the first suggestion effect trigger is set even when the new hold is not a hold that becomes a long-open jackpot. The hold lottery may be configured to run (preferably the winning probability in that case is lower than the lottery run if the new hold is a hold that is a long open jackpot) and new. The fluctuation time at the time of holding digestion may be longer than a predetermined time (or the so-called reach state depending on the combination of decorative symbols) may be added to the occurrence condition, or at the time of holding digestion prior to the new holding. The fluctuation time in the above may not be longer than a predetermined time (or the so-called reach state may not be achieved by the combination of decorative symbols), which may be added to the generation condition. However, when the first suggestion effect trigger hold exists and the first long open suggestion image is displayed, it is notified that a probabilistic jackpot can occur (it cannot be a non-probabilistic jackpot). Therefore, the condition for generating the first suggestion effect trigger hold is that the new hold is not a short-open jackpot.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the second suggestion effect execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-reduced / probability-variable gaming state.

In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a symbol change at the present time, the change (currently executed change) is a short open jackpot (second big prize). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation is such that the mouth C20 is a jackpot that is opened only for a very short time, and the jackpot is scheduled to shift to a non-probability variable gaming state after the special game related to the jackpot is completed.

In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first suggestion effect execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the second suggestion effect execution flag is off. Here, the purpose of determining whether or not the first suggestion effect execution flag is off is to perform exclusive control between the above-mentioned first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process (simultaneous parallelism). Therefore, it should be added that the determination process is not required when the above-mentioned first suggestion effect execution control process is not implemented.

In the case of Yes in step 2308, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is turned from off to on (the symbol change start timing). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is won with a predetermined probability (preferably lower probability than the above-mentioned first suggestion effect trigger hold lottery, for example, 1/10). , The second suggestion production lottery is executed. Next, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the second suggestion effect lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the second suggestion effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2308, that is, when the second suggestion effect execution flag is on, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a second long open suggestion image (a big hit while displaying the image). If this is the case, a command is set to display an image indicating that a probability variation jackpot will occur, and the image is the same as or substantially the same as the above-mentioned first long open suggestion image), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). do.

On the other hand, if No in step 2302, step 2304, or step 2306, in step 2320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the second long open suggestion image. Next, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the second suggestion effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2310 or step 2314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

With this configuration, in the second suggestion effect execution control process, since the second long open suggestion image is displayed, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred thereafter. However, as shown in this example, by controlling so that the second long open suggestion image is not displayed by the end of the symbol change related to the non-probability change jackpot at the latest, the second long open suggestion image is displayed as a result. It is configured so that a probable change jackpot can occur during the period. That is, in the second suggestion effect execution control process, unlike the first suggestion effect execution control process, the hit / fail determination result (and the type of stop symbol) of the undigested hold (in this example, especially the second main game hold) ) Since there is no need to make a preliminary determination, it is easy to execute regardless of the occurrence status of undigested hold, the type of gaming state, and the presence or absence of transition of the gaming state, and in the second suggestion effect execution control process, the first 1 It is possible to continue to display "an image notifying that if a big hit occurs while displaying the image, a probable change big hit" is displayed for a longer period of time than the suggestion effect execution control process (for example, first). Hold digestion on the main game side → Hold digestion on the second main game side, or hold digestion on the second main game side → Hold digestion on the first main game side, so as to straddle the hold digestion on the different main game side It is possible to continue to display even in such a situation, and even in a situation that straddles different gaming states such as probability fluctuation gaming state → non-probability fluctuation gaming state, it continues. In addition to being able to continue to display, the period of continuous display will not depend on the maximum number of holds or the maximum number of stays in the gaming state).

That is, to summarize the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process, <feature 1> there is no hold on the first main game side that is undigested and / or the second is undigested. Even if there is no hold on the main game side, the first long open suggestion image or the second long open suggestion image can be continuously displayed. <Feature 2> The hold on the first main game side that is undigested is Even when the pattern on the 2nd main game side changes in the existing state, the 1st long opening suggestion image or the 2nd long opening suggestion image can be continuously displayed. <Feature 3> Undigested 2nd main The first long opening suggestion image or the second long opening suggestion image can be continuously displayed even when the symbol of the first main game side changes in the state where the game side hold exists, <feature 4> second. Even when the symbol of the first main game side changes after the symbol of the main game side changes, the first long opening suggestion image or the second long opening suggestion image can be continuously displayed. <Feature 5> The first main game side Even when the symbol on the 2nd main game side changes after the symbol change, the 1st long open suggestion image or the 2nd long open suggestion image can be continuously displayed. <Feature 6> Only the symbol change on the 1st main game side Under the situation where it is being performed, only the display / non-display of the second long open suggestion image caused by the execution of the second suggestion effect execution control process is performed. Under the situation where it is being performed, not only the display / non-display of the second length open suggestion image caused by the execution of the second suggestion effect execution control process, but also the first length caused by the execution of the first suggestion effect execution control process. The opening suggestion image is also displayed / hidden.

In the above examples, the purpose is to clarify the difference between the control methods of the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process. Therefore, for example, the second long open suggestion image is used. It is an example that the occurrence of non-probability change jackpot becomes definite when it is hidden, but of course this example is not enough to enhance the interest of the game. , The additional configuration for enhancing the fun of the game will be described later as an example of modification. Further, as a condition for executing the display of the long opening suggestion image in this example, for example, the display is executed (or a lottery for whether or not to execute the display) on the condition that a hold that becomes a short opening jackpot occurs. Is executed), and the display may be erased before the start of the fluctuation of the hold that becomes the short opening jackpot (that is, by predetermining).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the lottery for determining the content of the map variation. With reference to the table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, it is doublet such as "7, 7, 7", or when it is a lost symbol. Is doublet such as "1, 3, 5"} and variation mode {for example, non-reach when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short-term variation, and normal reach when the variation mode is long-term variation. , Super reach, etc.} and temporarily store it in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2504. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S starts the map variation time management timer SM21t, and shifts to step 2510. Even if No in step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2510.

Next, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2511, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub-control board S and the map variation time management timer SM21t. Determine if it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2512, in step 2514, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a variation display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2020). , Step 2530.

On the other hand, if No in step 2512, in step 2516, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the decorative symbol based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not the display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2020, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Is sent to), and the process proceeds to step 2530.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2516, in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a preview image or a notice image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the preview image and the reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2020, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set. (Sent), and the process proceeds to step 2530. Even if No in step 2520, the process proceeds to step 2530.

Next, in step 2530, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2530, in step 2532, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2020). Will be). Next, in step 2534, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2536, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2510 or step 2530, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606 and step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag and displays the jackpot start display on the effect display device SG (appropriately based on the type of jackpot). (Display) command is set, and the process proceeds to step 2612. Even if No in step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2612.

Next, in step 2612, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (gaming property). It may be executed as needed based on the type of jackpot and the like). Next, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2614, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the end of the big hit (displaying appropriately based on the type of the big hit) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2618, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special gaming flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2700). Even if No in step 2604 or step 2614, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the second broadcast image in the second layer (the front layer of the third layer for displaying the decorative pattern) in the display control. do.

Here, as shown in the image diagram on the right side of the same figure, the first notification image, the second notification image, and the third notification image are right-handed to the player (so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area D30). It is to launch the game ball by adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball, and further, the first launch intensity that enables the game ball to be released to the game area D30, and the launch intensity that is larger than the first launch intensity and the game area D30. It is an image of the content instructing the second firing intensity that enables the game ball to be released, and the second firing intensity when defined). Also, regarding the concepts of the first layer, the second layer, the third layer, and the fourth layer in the display control, as shown in the lower part of the same image diagram, the first layer is the frontmost layer and the fourth layer is the rearmost layer. When the displayed images overlap, the image displayed on the front layer is preferentially displayed. The decorative pattern will be displayed on the third layer.

Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new first main game start opening ball entry detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is placed on the first layer (the front layer of the third layer for displaying the decorative pattern and the second layer for displaying the second broadcast image) in the display control. , A command for displaying the first broadcast image is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). Even if No in step 2706, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2708, that is, when the symbol is stopped at the timing when the ball entering the first main game start port A10 is detected during the time reduction game, in step 2712, the sub-control board S The CPUSC sets a command for displaying the first notified image in the fourth layer (the third layer for displaying the decorative pattern and the back layer of the second layer for displaying the second notified image) in the display control, and performs the following processing. (Processing in step 2020). Even if No in step 2706, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020).

On the other hand, if No in step 2702, that is, if the current gaming state is not the time-reduced gaming state, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2714, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in the third layer (third layer for displaying the decorative symbol) in the display control, and is at a position not overlapping with the decorative symbol. Set the command to display the notification image. Next, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new first main game start port entry ball detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first broadcast image on the first layer (the front layer of the third layer for displaying the decorative pattern and the third broadcast image) in the display control. Set the command to be displayed and move to the next process (process in step 2020). Even if No in step 2714 or step 2718, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020). Here, when the special game in progress flag is on, that is, when the special game is being executed, the second notification image cannot be displayed, so that the special game is being executed. It should be added that it is configured so as to avoid confusion with the third broadcast image displayed in. The notification image (an image that is always displayed, and in this example, the third notification image) during the special game may display the same image as the second notification image. In such a configuration, the display position of the notification image may be changed as appropriate (for example, the position displayed during the special game and the time shortened game state after the end of the special game are displayed. Make it different from the position, or enlarge / reduce it, etc.).

Here, in the present embodiment, the first notification image is displayed when the first main game start opening ball entry detection command is received from the main control board M side during the time-reduced game state or the special game execution. Although configured, a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of voice notification (for example, voice notification of "Please hit right") may be executed together with the display of the first notification image (for example, "right-handed"). Please ”→ Mute for a specified period →“ Please hit right ”→ Mute for a specified period →“ Please hit right ”). With this configuration, it is better to hit the player right now (adjust the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area D30). It will be possible to more reliably convey that it is highly profitable. Further, when the voice notification is executed together with the display of the first notification image, the display of the first notification image may be terminated at the timing when the number of executions of the voice notification reaches the predetermined number of times. Further, when the first main game start opening ball entry detection command is newly received from the main side one or more times before the number of times the voice notification is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, from the timing. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute the voice notification and the display of the first notification image a predetermined number of times again (from the end timing of the executed voice notification).

Although not particularly shown in the present embodiment, the first broadcast image is a fixed still image, and the second broadcast image is a moving image that moves within a certain range. With this configuration, even if the second broadcast image is displayed smaller than the first broadcast image, the player moves the second broadcast image within a certain range (it is a moving image). Can be easily recognized.

With the above configuration, in the launch position notification control process, the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted so that the game ball is hit right (the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area D30) in the progress of the game. In situations where it is desirable to launch) (in this example, the second main game start opening B10 and the large winning opening are provided on the right side of the game area D30, so that the time is shortened during the game and during the special game), the game is played. An image instructing a person to hit right is displayed on a plurality of patterns corresponding to the situation of the game (in this example, a decorative pattern is displayed on the third layer, and in the time-saving game state, the second layer is displayed. 2 The notification image is displayed, and in particular, when the ball entering the first main game start port A10 is detected, the first notification image is displayed on the first layer while the symbol is changing, and the fourth layer is displayed when the symbol is stopped. In addition, during the special game, the third notification image is displayed at a position on the third layer that does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and in particular, the first main game start port A10 is displayed. When the incoming ball is detected, it is configured so that it can be displayed in a pattern (a pattern for displaying the first notification image on the first layer), and it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

(Examples of changes related to the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process)
As described above, the control method of the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process is not limited to the one shown in the above embodiment, and in particular, the interest of the game. There is room for further improvement in order to increase it. <Improvement example 1> For example, the first long opening suggestion effect is configured to be able to start when the second main game hold occurs, but the effect is produced when the main game symbol starts to change or when a special game is being executed. It may be configured to be able to start. Similarly, the second long opening suggestion effect can be configured so that the effect can be started at the same timing as the start trigger of the first long opening effect (when a hold occurs, when a fluctuation starts, during special game execution, etc.). , It is possible to enhance the effect of the second long opening suggestion effect (so-called Gase effect). <Improvement Example 2> Further, the end trigger of the long opening suggestion effect (first long open suggestion effect and second long open suggestion effect) is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment (particularly, it relates to the non-probability change jackpot). If the second long open suggestion image is hidden only when the symbol changes, the occurrence of the non-probability variable jackpot becomes definite when the second long open suggestion image is hidden. Therefore, the second long open suggestion image may be hidden even when the symbol changes related to the probability change jackpot or when the symbol changes related to the loss), for example, the end lottery of the production is executed at the start of the change. , If the end lottery is won, the long opening suggestion effect may be terminated (in that case, if the hold that is the earliest big hit in the hold is the hold that is the long open big hit). Low probability, high probability if the first big hit hold in the hold is a short open big hit hold, medium probability if there is no big hit hold in the hold, win the end lottery By doing so, it is possible to create a production with a high degree of expectation as the production continues). <Improvement Example 3> Further, at the start of the effect, the upper limit number of fluctuations for which the effect continues is determined, and when the number of subsequent changes reaches the upper limit change number, the effect is configured to end. You may. In addition, when executing the Gase effect, it is preferable to configure the effect to end at least before the short opening jackpot.

Further, after the end of the special game, the first long opening suggestion effect or the second long open suggestion effect may be always executed, and if such a configuration is made, there is a discrepancy in the effects {for example, the special game. When the main game symbol that stops first after the end of is a 4B symbol (a symbol that becomes a non-time shortened game state and a non-probability variable game state after the special game is executed), the first length opening suggestion effect or the second length In order to prevent the situation where the opening suggestion effect is executed}, the first long open suggestion effect or the second long open suggestion effect that may cause the discrepancy is not executed at the start of the change of the main game symbol. Is desirable.

Further, in the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process, the first long open suggestion image and the second long open suggestion image are referred to in the time-reduced gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state. It was controlled so that if a big hit occurs while the image is being displayed, the image will notify the player that a big hit will occur. However, the content to be notified to the player is not limited to this, for example, non-time reduction. In the case of a gaming state and a probability-changing gaming state, "an image notifying that the jackpot expectation level will increase if the image is displayed, or a probability-changing game in which the current gaming state is displayed if the image is displayed. It may be controlled so as to be an image notifying that the possibility of being in a state is increased, and of course, in the case of a non-time shortened gaming state and a non-probability variable gaming state, the first long opening suggestion image and the first 2 Control the long open suggestion image to be "an image that notifies that if a big hit occurs while displaying the image, it will be a probable variable big hit", or "if the image is displayed, the big hit expectation increases. It may be controlled to be an image notifying the fact, or an image notifying that if the image is displayed, the possibility that the current gaming state is a probability fluctuation gaming state increases.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the second large winning opening C20 during the special game, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game. In a definite gaming machine (so-called ball-certain type gaming machine), it is configured to be able to execute an effect (long opening suggestion effect) that suggests an opening mode of the large winning opening (particularly, the second large winning opening C20). However, it is not limited to this, and a general gaming machine (for example, a type in which the possibility of transition to the probability-variable gaming state is determined according to the type of the jackpot symbol, or the probability-variable gaming state continues until the next jackpot. In the pachinko / pachislot machine), it is possible to perform an effect (an effect corresponding to the first long opening suggestion effect and the second long open suggestion effect) to notify that a big hit will result in a probability fluctuation big hit during the effect. It may be configured. In addition, a production that suggests the number of times the big winning opening is opened (so-called maximum number of rounds) in the special game executed when a big hit is made during the production (that is, if a big hit is made during the production, a 15-round big hit It may be configured so that the effect of notifying that the effect is to be executed) may be executed. For example, the effect of notifying that a 15-round jackpot will be obtained may be configured to occur simultaneously {that is, if both effects are occurring simultaneously, a jackpot during the effect. In that case, since the purpose is to be notified that a probabilistic jackpot and a 15-round jackpot will be made, the image for the effect may be a separate image, or the effect of notifying that the probabilistic jackpot will be achieved = 1st image. (For example, a red background image), an effect of notifying that a 15-round jackpot will be obtained = a second image (for example, a yellow background image), an effect of notifying that a probabilistic jackpot and a 15-round jackpot will be obtained = a third image (for example). For example, as a golden background image), if the notification conditions are duplicated, a separate image may be displayed.}. In addition, when executing the effect of notifying the number of rounds in the special game, the number of execution rounds (the number of rounds including both the round in which the large winning opening is long open and the round in which the large winning opening is short open) is notified. Alternatively, only the rounds in which the big winning opening is open for a long time = the actual number of rounds may be notified. In addition, as described above, if a big hit occurs during the production, a probable variable jackpot will be obtained (or a jackpot that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 will be executed), and during the production. By configuring the effect to notify that the maximum round (for example, 15 rounds) will be a big hit in parallel with the big hit, if the big hit occurs during the effect, it will be a probable change big hit (or). , The fact that a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 is executed) is a big hit during the execution of the effect, so that the number of rounds is not fixed, but it is a probable change big hit. On the other hand, during the execution of the effect of notifying that the maximum round (for example, 15 rounds) will be a big hit if a big hit is made during the effect, the big hit will occur during the execution of the effect. It is possible to create a gaming machine having two game features, that is, it is not determined whether or not it is a big hit, but it is confirmed that it will be a big hit in the maximum round (15 rounds). In the case of such a configuration, when there are a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds (for example, 10 round jackpot and 15 round jackpot), the jackpot with the largest number of rounds (for example, 15). In the round jackpot), it may be configured so that there is a possibility of both a probabilistic jackpot and a non-probabilistic jackpot, and in the case of the jackpot with the largest number of rounds (for example, 15 round jackpot), the probability variable jackpot It is preferable to configure the structure so that the possibility of becoming a non-probability change jackpot is higher than the possibility of becoming a non-probability change jackpot.

Further, in the type of gaming machine in which the possibility of transition to the probability-variable gaming state is determined according to the type of the jackpot symbol, further modification examples can be given. More specifically, the type of jackpot on the 1st main game side = "probability variation jackpot and 15 rounds (the jackpot is open for a long time in all rounds) jackpot", "probability variation jackpot and real 5 round jackpot (first half) For 5 rounds, the big prize opening will be long open, while for the latter 10 rounds, the big prize opening will be short open 15 round big hit) "," Probability change big hit and 5 rounds (large prize opening for all rounds) "Big hit (long open)", "Non-probable variable big hit and real 5 round big hit (15 rounds where the big prize opening is long open for the first 5 rounds while the big prize opening is short open for the latter 10 rounds) Big hit) ”,“ Non-probable variable big hit and 5 rounds (the big winning opening will be open for a long time in all rounds) big hit ”, and the type of big hit on the 2nd main game side =“ Probable variable big hit and 15 rounds ( Big hit with big winning opening in all rounds), "Probability big hit and real 10 round big hit (10 rounds in the first half have long opening in the big winning opening, while 5 rounds in the second half have big winning "15 rounds big hit with short opening", "Probable variable big hit and 5 rounds (big winning with long opening in all rounds) big hit", "Non-probable big hit and 15 rounds (big hit in all rounds)" "Big hit with long open winning opening", "Non-probable variable big hit and real 10 round big hit (10 rounds in the first half will be long open, while 5 rounds in the latter half will be short open) It is assumed that it is set as "15 rounds big hit)" and "non-probable variable big hit and 5 rounds (the big winning opening is long open in all rounds) big hit". In this case, for example, when the big hit on the first main game side is accurately notified that the maximum number of rounds = 15 rounds, the time when the sixth round in which the big winning opening is long open is executed. So, while the transition to the probability fluctuation game state is definite in appearance, when the 6th round is executed when the big winning opening is short-opened or when the 6th round is not executed and the big hit ends. The transition to the stochastic gaming state is not deterministic in appearance. Therefore, if this setting is utilized, when the sixth round in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time is executed, the player is clearly notified whether or not the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state is possible, or the large winning opening is used. If the sixth round, which is a long opening, is not executed, the player is not clearly notified of the possibility of transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state (or is clearly notified as a so-called promotion effect). This can improve the fun of the game. However, as shown in this example, if a big hit occurs on the first main game side with "a production that notifies that a big hit will be a probable change big hit during the production", it is before the start of the big hit. Since the player has already been clearly notified of whether or not the player can shift to the probability-variable gaming state, whether or not to execute the notification regarding whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state during such a big hit is appropriately switched. It is desirable to configure it so that it can be used. In addition, regarding "a production that notifies that if a big hit occurs during the production, it will be a 15-round big hit", "a real 5-round big hit (the first half of the 5 rounds has a long opening of the big prize opening, while the latter 10 "15 rounds big hits where the big prize opening is short open for the rounds)" and "actually 10 round big hits (the big prize openings are long open for the first 10 rounds, while the big prize openings are short for the latter 5 rounds) It is desirable to configure it so that it will not be executed when "open 15 rounds of big hits)" occurs (because it may be perceived by the player as a false notification).

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, if it is the first long open suggestion image, it is mainly at the time of digestion of the first suggestion effect trigger hold, and if it is the second long open suggestion image, it is mainly at the time of fluctuation that becomes a short open jackpot. Etc., by erasing these images at the timing (that is, the timing according to the progress of the game), the long opening suggestion effect is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In particular, whether or not the long-opening suggestion effect should be terminated if the gaming machine is turned off or restored during the period when the first long-opening suggestion image or the second long-opening suggestion image is displayed. The option arises. Therefore, an example in the case of focusing on such a case is referred to as a change example 1 from the present embodiment, and the changes will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 25 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, the changes from the present embodiment are about step 2010 (variation 1), step 2012 (variation 1), and step 2013 (variation 1), and the purpose thereof is the time when the power failure occurs and the time when the power failure occurs. It is to memorize whether or not the long opening suggestion effect is executed at the time (in the process described later, the time during which the power is cut off is derived from the time when the power is cut off and the time when the power is restored). That is, at the time of receiving the power interruption signal, in step 2010 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the real-time clock RTC and acquires (latches) the RTC value. Next, in step 2012 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stores the acquired RTC value in the evacuation area as the RTC value at the time of power interruption (power interruption time). Next, in step 2013 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stores game-related information (information related to the progress of the game, such as the first suggestion effect flag and the second suggestion effect flag) in the evacuation area. , Step 2016.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of initial processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. 25 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, the changes from this embodiment are about step 2060 (variant 1) to step 2068 (variant 1), and the purpose is to be able to derive the time when the power is turned on and to be disconnected. It is configured to restore whether or not the long opening suggestion effect is executed at the time of occurrence. That is, in the case of Yes in step 2056, in other words, when various information commands from the main control board M side are received, in step 2060 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the real-time clock RTC. , RTC value is acquired (latch). Next, in step 2062 (variation 1), the sub-main control unit SM compares the acquired RTC value (current time of recovery from power failure) with the RTC value at the time of power failure stored in the save area, and power is generated. The disconnection time value (RTC value at the time of power failure recovery-RTC value at the time of power failure) is derived. Next, in step 2064 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the derived power interruption time value for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and is used during maintenance of the gaming machine during the business hours of the gaming hall. It is a value for the purpose of distinguishing whether it is the power cut time or the power cut time from the end of the business hours of the amusement park to the start of the next business)). In the case of Yes in step 2064 (variation 1), that is, when the power is cut off (and various information commands are received from the main control board M side instead of the RAM clear information) for the predetermined time or longer, step 2066 ( In change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the power interruption flag for a long time, and proceeds to step 2068 (change 1). On the other hand, if No in step 2064 (variant 1), that is, if the power is cut off for less than 10 minutes, the process proceeds to step 2068 (change 1) without turning on the long-time power cutoff flag. Next, in step 2068 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the information stored in the save area (information related to the progress of the game, such as the first suggestion effect flag and the second suggestion effect flag). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2002).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first suggestion effect execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 25 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, the changes from this embodiment are about step 2201 (variant 1) and step 2227 (variant 1), the purpose of which is the above-mentioned power-off time for a long time (for example, 10 minutes or more). If this is the case, the long-opening suggestion effect that was being executed at the time of the power failure is terminated. That is, at the start of execution of the subroutine, in step 2201 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the long-time power failure flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2201 (variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2202, and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2201 (variation 1), in step 2227 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the power interruption flag for a long time, shifts to step 2228, and is the same as the present embodiment. The process (the process of ending the first suggestion effect) is executed.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the second suggestion effect execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 25 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, the changes from the present embodiment are for step 2301 (variant 1) and step 2319 (variant 1), the purpose of which is the above-mentioned power-off time for a long time (for example, 10 minutes or more). If this is the case, the long-opening suggestion effect that was being executed at the time of the power failure is terminated. That is, at the start of execution of the subroutine, in step 2301 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the long-time power interruption flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2301 (variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2302, and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2301 (variation 1), in step 2319 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the power interruption flag for a long time, shifts to step 2320, and is the same as the present embodiment. The process (the process of ending the second suggestion effect) is executed.

By making the above changes, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the time elapsed from the occurrence of the power failure to the re-turning on the power is a predetermined time (10 minutes in this example) or more. In some cases (especially when the RAM is not cleared), the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (effect suggesting the possibility of a long open jackpot) that were executed when the power failure occurred are performed when the power failure is restored. It is configured to be able to exit. By configuring in this way, for example, when the power is turned off due to the end of business of the game hall and the power is turned on again due to the start of business, it is possible to prevent the long opening suggestion effect from being executed from the start of the game. Can be done. In particular, in the second long open suggestion image, "an image notifying that if a big hit occurs while displaying the image, a probable change big hit" is displayed even if there is no undigested hold or the game state is a game. It is possible to continue to display even in the normal game state, which is disadvantageous to the person, even if the power is turned off due to the end of business of the game hall and the power is turned on again due to the start of business. It is possible to continue displaying. However, if "an image notifying that a big hit is a big hit while displaying the image" is displayed at the start of business, a new player (in other words, a player who came after the business started) is displayed. For example, a player who is likely to be different from the player who was playing at the time of the power failure), even though the situation is not particularly advantageous for the player, it is heard that the situation is also advantageous for the player. As a result, there is a risk of causing an unreasonable effect of attracting customers at the start of business, so under the circumstances presumed to be at the start of business, the second chief opening suggestion image was displayed at the time of power failure. Even so, it is desirable to erase it properly. On the other hand, if the time elapsed from the occurrence of the power failure to the power-on again is less than the predetermined time (10 minutes in this example), in other words, the power failure time during maintenance of the gaming machine during the business hours of the game hall. When it is presumed that the same player is still playing the game, and when the second long opening suggestion image is displayed at the time of power failure, the power is transmitted. If it is not configured to be redisplayed even when the power is restored, the player may mistakenly think that this power failure has triggered a loss of the opportunity to become a probable change jackpot. If the time elapsed until the power is turned on again is less than a predetermined time (10 minutes in this example), the second long open suggestion image is restored and redisplayed when the power is restored. That's why.

The configuration of the display mode of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be appropriately changed, and for example, a situation in which the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed (for example, a non-time saving game and non-time saving game). In the probability fluctuation game state), when the game is not executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) (when the ball is not entered into the entrance and the symbol is not changed), the demo screen is displayed (for example, the game). While shifting to the display of moving images to introduce the characters appearing in the machine to the player), in the situation where the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed, the time when the game is not executed continues. Even if it does, it may be configured so as not to shift to the demo screen display.

(Example 2 of change from this embodiment)
Further, in the above embodiment, in the launch position notification control process, the notification image is displayed using the four layers in the display control, but this is only an example, and the layer layer is not limited to this. It is also possible to reduce the processing load. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as change example 2 from the present embodiment, and only the changes will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 16 in the second modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are from step 2730 (variant 2) to step 2746 (variant 2), the purpose of which is to reduce the number of display layers to be used and to reduce the processing load. That is, in the case of Yes in step 2702 (when the time reduction game state is in progress), in step 2730 (variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the second broadcast image on the second layer in the display control. Set the command.

Here, as shown in the lower part of the image diagram on the right side of the same figure, in the second modification from the present embodiment, the display layer is only three layers.

Next, in step 2732 (variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732 (variant 2), in step 2734 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the display layer of the decorative pattern as the third layer (the rearmost display layer) (first broadcast image). The layer that can display is the first layer), and the process proceeds to step 2738 (variant 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2732 (variant 2) (when the symbol is stopped), in step 2736 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the decorative symbol display layer as the first layer (frontmost display). The layer) is determined (the layer on which the first broadcast image can be displayed is the third layer), and the process proceeds to step 2738 (variation 2).

Next, in step 2738 (variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new first main game start opening ball entry detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2738 (variation 2), in step 2740 (variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a layer capable of displaying the first notification image (decorative pattern display layer and second notification image display layer). A command for displaying the first broadcast image is set in the first layer or the third layer, which is not a layer, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2738 (variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020).

Further, in the case of No in step 2714, in other words, when the game is not in the time-reduced gaming state and is not in the special gaming state (not in the right-handed situation), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set in step 2742 (variation 2). , Determines whether or not a new second main game start opening ball entry detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2742 (variant 2), in step 2746 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the left notification image in the first layer in the display control, and performs the next process (variable 2). Step 2020 process). On the other hand, if No in step 2742 (variation 2), in step 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new auxiliary game start port entry detection command has been received. If Yes in step 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to step 2746 (second). If No in 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process in step 2020).

Here, the left notification image is, as shown in the image diagram of the same figure, left-handed to the player (the game ball is adjusted by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area D30). It is an image instructing to launch).

By making the above changes, according to the game machine according to the second change example from the present embodiment, the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area D30 in the progress of the game. A situation in which it is desirable to adjust the strength to launch the game ball (in this example, the game ball flowing down on the left side of the game area D30 easily enters the first main game start port A10, so that the non-time reduction game is performed. In the middle and during non-special game), entry into the ball entry port provided on the right side of the game area D30 (in this example, in particular, the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10) is detected. In this case, it is configured so that an image instructing the player to strike left can be displayed, and the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the large winning opening, the gaming ball shifts to the probability-variable gaming state, and shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state a predetermined number of times. In the gaming machine configured to do so, the effect of encouraging the player to win the long-open jackpot and the effect of instructing the player to divide into the game area D30 according to the game state have been described in detail. The playability of the gaming machine that can perform the production is not limited to this. As a second embodiment, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the gaming machine having other game features capable of executing the effect.

First, FIG. 30 is a drawing showing a basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the general winning opening P10 is provided on the right side of the game area D30 when viewed from the player, and below the right side of the first large winning opening C10. As described above, among the game balls that have flowed down on the right side of the game area D30 and have flowed down in the vicinity of the second large winning opening C20 and the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20 and the first one. A game ball that has not entered the large winning opening C10 can enter the general winning opening P10. Further, at the upstream position of the path of the game ball that can flow down to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 on the left side when viewed from the player in the game area D30, the auxiliary game start port H10- 2 is further provided. In this way, regardless of whether the player performs either "right-handed" or "left-handed" hitting, the ball enters (passes) into either the auxiliary game starting port H10-1 (H10-2). As a result, the game ball can enter the second main game start port B10 by operating the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Further, a launch instruction display unit HS is provided in the lower left portion of the center decoration D38. Here, the launch instruction display unit HS is composed of two lamps, and when the lamp on the right side (right-handed display unit HSR) is lit, it is in a state of recommending "right-handed" to the player, and the left side. When the lamp (left-handed display unit HSL) is lit, it indicates that the player is recommended to "left-handed". Further, in the second embodiment, one speaker D24 is provided on each side of the game lamp D26 provided on the upper part of the game board D35, and the speaker left D24L is provided on the left side and the speaker right D24R is provided on the right side. It has become. The location and mode of these installations are not limited to this example.

Next, FIG. 31 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1050 (second) and step 1800 (second), that is, in step 1050 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays a firing instruction to be described later. The unit control process is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of step 1100. Further, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game control process, and then in step 1800 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later. The process proceeds to step 1910. The number of prize balls paid out in the process of step 1910 is the first main game start opening A10: 4 balls, the second main game start opening B10: 3 balls, and the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20). : 15 balls, general winning opening P10: 3 balls. Further, in step 1014, regarding various information commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, a command (launching) for returning the display of the first notification image to the fourth notification image after the command related to the time reduction counter value is transmitted. The instruction command) will be sent.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the firing instruction display unit control process according to the subroutine of step 1050 (second) of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1052, in step 1056, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the left-handed display unit HSL of the launch instruction display unit HS and turns on the right-handed display unit HSR. On the other hand, if No in step 1052, in step 1054, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1054, in step 1058, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the right-handed display unit HSR of the launch instruction display unit HS and turns on the left-handed display unit HSL, and next processing (step 1100). Process). If No in step 1054, the process proceeds to step 1056, that is, the left-handed display unit HSL is turned off, the right-handed display unit HSR is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). .. In this way, when the main game time reduction flag is on (that is, when the current game state is the time reduction game state) or when the special game execution flag is on (the special game is) in the launch instruction display unit HS. (When it is being executed), the right-handed display unit HSR is turned on to display a recommendation to the player to "right-handed". If it is not being executed, the left-handed display unit HSL is turned on to display a recommendation to the player to "left-handed". It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and by providing one firing instruction display unit HS, the firing instruction display unit HS is lit depending on whether or not it is lit, depending on the color emitted when it is lit, or blinking. Depending on the embodiment, the player may be provided with recommended instructions for "right-handed" and "left-handed". Furthermore, immediately before the end of the state in which "right-handed" and "left-handed" are recommended (for example, the time-reduced game state in which "right-handed" is recommended) is completed, the lighting mode and the lighting color are changed. Then, it can be configured to notify the player in advance that the state in which "right-handed" or "left-handed" is recommended ends. Furthermore, when the control regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine is different, whether or not the situation to be right-handed is not the time-shortening gaming state on the main game side, but the probability fluctuation state, and the special game execution. If the mode should be controlled by being linked to another flag, such as when the electric accessory is operating (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is open) as well as inside, it is appropriately judged as a right-handed judgment target. It is conceivable to change the type and number of flags to be used.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game stop symbol at the lower right of the figure, and when the auxiliary game symbol is won in the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. The opening mode of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d in each of the stop symbols "D1 and D2" is configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-time shortened gaming state, when "D1" is stopped as the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, the opening mode is (open → closed for 0.2 seconds). When "D2" is stopped, the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 5 seconds → closed). On the other hand, when "D1" is stopped in the time-reduced gaming state, the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 2 seconds → closed for 1 second → open for 2.2 seconds → closed). When "D2" is stopped, the opening mode is (1.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4 seconds open → closed).

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the requirement for satisfying the fluctuation start condition related to the determination in step 1403, and in the second embodiment, the fluctuation start condition is that the small hit game is not in progress. It is an additional requirement for fulfillment. Further differences include step 1412 (second), step 1550 (second), step 1414 (second) and step 1750 (second), and steps 1434 (second) to 1438 (second). ), That is, in step 1410-2, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result (see the main game table 2). In step 1412 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency A flag (the flag that is turned on in the limited frequency A state) is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412 (second), in step 1550 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1415. On the other hand, if No in step 1412 (second), in step 1414 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the limited frequency B flag (flag that is turned on in the limited frequency B state) turned on. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1414 (second), in step 1750 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1415.

Here, the main game table 2 shown in FIG. 35 is an example of the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41-B). As shown in this figure, in the second embodiment, seven types of stop symbols at the time of a big hit on the first main game side and six types of stop symbols on the second main game side are provided, and each stop is provided. The design is sorted by the difference of five elements. The above five elements are the number of rounds with balls (the number of rounds of long open rounds), the number of actual rounds (the number of all rounds executed, and the number of rounds including both long open rounds and short open rounds). (There is also the number of execution rounds), probability fluctuation after the end of the special game Whether or not there is a transition to the gaming state, whether or not there is a transition to the time shortening after the end of the special game, and whether or not there is a transition to the gaming state, the time reduction given after the end of the special game The number of times. If the jackpot on the second main game side is won, the game always shifts to the time-shortened game state after the special game is completed, and there are a plurality of jackpot symbols related to the jackpot with a relatively low expected value of winning the prize ball in the jackpot. It is configured to exist. In the big hit (the actual number of rounds is "7") related to the stop symbol "9A", the number of rounds with balls is "6", but in the first round, the opening is the same as the opening mode of the small hit. Aspect pattern {For example, short opening (for example, opening for 1.8 seconds → closing for 0.5 seconds), which is a mode in which it is difficult for a predetermined number of game balls, which is an end condition, to enter even if the game balls are continuously fired during the round. ) Is repeated 3 times (however, there is no closing time for the 3rd time)}, and even if the opening mode of the large winning opening during the first round or the small hit in the big hit is visually recognized, it is a small hit. Since it is difficult to determine whether it is a probability change jackpot or a probability change jackpot, it is configured so that the reverse probability change transition effect described later can be executed. In this case, in the subsequent 6 rounds (rounds after the 2nd round) of the big hit related to "9A", the big winning opening is opened in a long opening pattern so that the ball can be obtained. In addition, since it is configured not to shift to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the big winning opening, the probability fluctuation game state and the non-probability change state after the end of the big hit. It shifts to a time-reduced gaming state (sometimes called latent probability change).

If No in step 1414 (second), in step 1410-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol with reference to the main game table 3. Then, the process proceeds to step 1415.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 36 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this figure, in the second embodiment, even when the variation mode related to the small hit symbol is determined, the variation mode (with reference to the same table as in the case of determining the variation mode related to the big hit symbol) ( It is configured to determine (variation time). As a more preferable embodiment, even in the case of a big hit, the lottery table for determining the variable mode to be referred to may be different depending on the type of the symbol, and the small hit symbol and the jackpot symbol corresponding to "9A" are the same. It is preferable to refer to the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the above.

Further, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is not a jackpot symbol, and then in step 1434 (second), the CPUMC of the main game symbol is the main game symbol. It is determined whether or not the stop symbol of is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1434 (second), in step 1436 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and shifts to the process of step 1450. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1434 (second), in step 1438 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is information for displaying an instruction display regarding the launch of the game ball to the player, which is a launch instruction command. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930), and the next process (process in step 1500). Move to. In the second embodiment, the execution timing of the specific game end determination process of step 1450 is different from that of the present embodiment, and the process of step 1450 is executed after the changing flag is turned off in step 1424. There is.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 (second) of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 {counter (decrement counter) subtracted for each fluctuation when the limited frequency A flag is on} is set. It is determined whether or not the continuous fanning effect execution value (counter value related to the number of time reductions for executing the effect of fanning whether or not the time-reduced gaming state continues, 41, 21, 1 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A-1, and based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1558. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A-2, and the variation mode (variation) regarding the main game symbol is based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. Time) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1558. The setting of the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency A counter shown here is triggered by the stoppage of the jackpot symbols "2A", "2B", "4A", "4B", "6A", and "6B". The process of turning on the flag and setting the value of the time reduction number according to the symbol is executed.

Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1560, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag and proceeds to step 1564. On the other hand, even if No in step 1560, the process proceeds to step 1564. Next, in step 1564, the CPUMC of the main control board M is determined by referring to the limited frequency A command (command to the sub control board S side and the limited frequency table A-1 or the limited frequency table A-2). A set (command related to the variable time related to the main game symbol) (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1415). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 37 in the second embodiment, when the value of the limited frequency counter is a predetermined value (continuous fanning effect execution value), the limited frequency table A-1 is referred to, but the step is taken. Even when Yes in 1552, different tables such as the limited frequency tables A-1, A-1 ′, and A-1 ″ may be used depending on the limited frequency A counter value.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B, and based on the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, and the stop symbol related to the main game symbol, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1754. Next, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a counter value of a limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 {a counter (decrement counter) that is subtracted for each symbol variation when the limited frequency B flag is on}. Subtract 1 from (decrement). Next, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency B flag and proceeds to step 1760. On the other hand, even if No in step 1756, the process proceeds to step 1760. Next, in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the variable time of the main game symbol determined by referring to the limited frequency table B, which is a command to the limited frequency B command (command to the sub control board S side). The relevant command) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1415).

Next, FIG. 39 is an example of the limited frequency table A-1, the limited frequency table A-2, and the limited frequency table B according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is a continuation possibility value (a variation in which the time shortened gaming state may end when the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are present). It is a counter value related to the number of times, and in this example, the limited frequency table A-1 is referred to when it is 41, 21, 1), and the limited frequency table A-2 is selected when the counter value is not a continuation possibility value. It is configured. As shown in the figure, the fluctuation time at the time of loss when referring to the limited frequency table A-2 is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time at the time of loss when referring to the limited frequency table A-1. It is configured to be. In other words, when the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is the continuation possibility value (41, 21, 1 in this example), it fluctuates when the result of the success or failure of the main game symbol is a loss. The time is relatively long, and it is configured so that the execution time of the fanning effect of whether or not the time-reduced gaming state continues can be guaranteed.

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1451 (second), that is, in step 1451 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. judge. If Yes in step 1451 (second), the process proceeds to step 1462. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1451 (second), in other words, when the gaming state is a stochastic variable gaming state, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500) without performing the processes of steps 1462 to 1470. do. As described above, in the second embodiment, unlike the present embodiment, the probability-variable gaming state does not end depending on the number of symbol changes, in other words, when the game shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game, It is configured so that at least the probability fluctuation game state does not end until the next big hit. When the determination process of step 1451 (second) is not provided and the game is controlled to the probability fluctuation game state, a maximum value (for example, a maximum value of 2 bytes 65535) or a value such as 10000 times is set in the time reduction counter. It is also possible to set it so that the jackpot is substantially guaranteed until the next time.

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process of step 1500 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1514 (second) and step 1516 (second), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time reduction counter MP52c to zero in step 1508. In step 1514 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 and the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1516 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to the process of step 1510.

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are step 1611 (second), 1625 (second), step 1628 (second), step 1632 (second), step 1700 (second), and step 1645 (second). 2) In addition, a gaming machine that can acquire the right to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the game ball into the specific area C22 provided in the large winning opening during the special game. This means that the configuration related to (sometimes referred to as a type) has been deleted, that is, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M has set a special game start display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side). Later, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a launch instruction command (a command set at the start of the special game, which should be left-handed or right-handed) at the start of the special game. Information on what should be done is included, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1616. Further, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first (second) grand prize opening C10 (C20) and starts the opening timer, and then in step 1625 (second), the main control board. The CPUMC of M is a firing instruction command (a command set at the start of each round, which is a command set at the start of each round, and includes information on whether to execute left-handed or right-handed), which will be described later. The command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1626. Further, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state information command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the special game, and then in step 1628 (second), the main control board M. CPUMC determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) has been won in the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20). In the case of Yes in step 1628 (second), in step 1632 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first (second) grand prize opening C10 (C20) and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1628 (second), in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the release timer has reached a predetermined time (for example, 29.0 seconds in the long open pattern). judge. If Yes in step 1630, the process proceeds to step 1632 (second), while if No in step 1630, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (second)}. Further, in step 1644, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the sub-control board S side), in step 1700 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set. , The game state determination process after the end of the special game described later is executed. Next, in step 1645 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether to execute a left-handed strike or a right-handed strike at the end of the special game, which is a launch instruction command (a command set at the end of the special game). Information on whether to execute is included, a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (second)}. With this configuration, in a gaming machine that determines whether or not to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a jackpot based on a jackpot symbol, a launch instruction command (game) is used at a plurality of timings during execution of a special game. It is a command related to information for notifying the launching direction recommended to the player, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and information related to the instruction display of the firing position to the player is set to the sub-control board S side. By transmitting, the sub-control board S side executes an appropriate launch instruction effect according to the state of the game at the timing when the launch direction recommended for the player is switched from left-handed to right-handed or right-handed to left-handed. You will be able to do it. As an example of the opening pattern of the round of step 1618, the short opening pattern A (the closing time after the last opening is not provided) in which "1.8 seconds opening → 0.5 closing" is repeated three times as the short opening pattern. ), There is a short opening pattern B (the closing time after the last opening is not provided) in which "1.8 seconds opening → 0.2 closing" is performed only once, and as a long opening pattern, "29.0 seconds". Long-opening pattern A that is "open-> closed" (no closing time is provided after the last opening), long-opening pattern that is "1.8-second open-> 0.5-second close-> 28.0-second open-> closed" B (there is no closing time after the last opening), etc.

FIG. 43 is an example of the contents of the launch instruction command {command set in the process of step 1625 (second)} at the start of the round in the second embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, "MODE data" and "EVENT data" corresponding to "command contents" are listed, and the contents are as follows. In the following notation, "○○ H" and "○○○○ B" indicate hexadecimal notation and binary number notation, respectively.
Short opening pattern A: 9CH, 04H (00000100B)
Short opening pattern B: 9CH, 06H (00000011B)
Long opening pattern A: 9CH, 05H (00000011B) Long opening pattern B: 9CH, 07H (0000111B)

Here, the "MODE data" is data indicating the type of command (for example, a launch instruction command at the start of a special game, a launch instruction command at the start of a round, a launch instruction command at the end of a special game, etc.). "9CH" indicates that it is a launch instruction command at the start of the round. On the other hand, "EVENT data" is, for example, as shown in the lower part of the figure, by the three-digit number of "0" and "1" (in 3 bits), the content of the command (launch instruction mode, big winning opening). It can be data representing an open pattern, etc.). More specifically, in order from the upper digit among the three digits, the digit (1): "0" represents left-handed, "1" represents information related to the right-handed firing mode, and the digit (2). : "0" represents the information related to the opening pattern A as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, "1" represents the information related to the opening pattern B as the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and the digit of (3): "0" is the big winning. "1" indicates information that the mouth is opened in the short opening pattern, and "1" indicates information that the large winning opening is opened in the long opening pattern. As a specific example, the command content (06H) when the bit string for identifying the open pattern of the "EVENT data" is "110B" is in a state where the right-handed firing mode is recommended, and the large winning opening It means that the opening pattern represents the information that is the short opening pattern B (for example, the opening pattern in which "1.8 seconds open → 0.2 seconds open" is performed only once). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this example, and when the data is 2 bytes as described below, more detailed information about the launch instruction mode, the large winning opening opening pattern, and the like can be transmitted.

Here, the instruction sent from the main control board M to the sub control board S in the game machine is generally composed of 2 bytes of data. One byte is "MODE data" and the other byte is "EVENT data". Since each most significant bit is a bit (identification bit) for discriminating between "MODE data" and "EVENT data", the remaining 7 bits are substantially used as a data area. The Rukoto.

In addition, an example of the launch instruction command shown in the figure is transmitted in order to make the opening pattern of the big winning opening identifiable at the time of a big hit, and the MODE data is separately set to "9DH" as a launch instruction command related to the game state. You may prepare data such as ". In such a configuration, a launch instruction command may be provided regarding the game state in which the EVENT data is set to the game state in which "00H" should be left-handed and the game state in which "01H" should be right-handed. .. Here, as an advantage of providing a command for instructing the recommended firing position in the left-right direction only when the EVENT data is "00H" and "01H", each flag such as the main game probability change flag, the main game time reduction flag, and the auxiliary game time reduction flag can be used. From among them, the information for which the flag is on (the state in which "01H" is stored in the storage area of the RWM) can be used as it is as EVENT data as information indicating that the state should be right-handed. Can be mentioned. In addition, by doing so, if right-handedness is recommended when any of the flags related to a plurality of gaming states is on, the result of OR calculation of each flag is used as EVENT data. This makes it possible to avoid complication of the process of determining whether or not each flag is on for the number of flags.

In the second embodiment, the following aspects are also possible.
(1) As described above, when detailed information can be transmitted as a firing instruction command from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, a plurality of opening patterns (multiple opening patterns) are used for the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Even if short and long open is executed in one round, etc.), information related to the plurality of open patterns is transmitted to the sub-control board S side by differentiating the contents of the launch instruction command. be able to. As an example, the open pattern information of each round is specified as an offset value by the information of the upper bit, and the least significant bit is set to "odd" → long open, "even" → short open. Then, on the sub-control board S side, it is possible to identify whether the offset is short-open or long-open by the information of the least significant bit. In the case where the open pattern of the short open pattern and the long open pattern can be identified by the least significant bit, there are three types of long open patterns A to C as the long open pattern and the short open pattern as the short open pattern. When four types of open patterns A to D are provided, the number of types of short open patterns is larger than the number of types of long open patterns, so the length is the difference of "4 types-3 types = 1". It may be configured to provide a dummy command (command whose least significant bit is odd) corresponding to the open pattern. Further, it may be configured to identify the launch instruction content by combining two or more types of commands, or it may be configured to provide all combination patterns and a number of launch instruction commands having a one-to-one correspondence. If it is decided to provide a one-to-one correspondence launch instruction command with all patterns, notification related to short opening (for example, black and white, instruction erased, etc.) is notified even within one round. ) And an instruction related to long opening (for example, notification by a positive mode such as light emission or accompanied by voice) can be switched.
(2) In the above-described configuration, the launch instruction command is generated on the main control board M side, and the sub control board S side executes an effect such as launch instruction display based on the content specified in the launch instruction command. Although configured, it is not limited to this, and information from the main control board M side (current game state, special game execution start command, jackpot symbol, opening command of each round, etc.) on the sub control board S side. ), The mode of the effect such as the launch instruction display may be determined, and the effect or the like may be executed by the effect display device SG.
(3) Further, when the large winning opening executes opening (short opening or long opening) a plurality of times in one round, the main control board M may transmit a firing instruction command multiple times in the round. Only when the sub-control board S side receives the instruction command related to the long opening of the big winning opening, the notification by the positive mode (the display area is enlarged. The strong light is emitted. The separate display is executed, the voice is executed. , Etc.) may be executed. For example, the instruction command is executed in one round, such as "1" → open for 29 seconds, "2" → open for 0.4 seconds, "3" → open for 2 seconds. In the corresponding case, if there is an open pattern such as "Open for 0.4 seconds → Closed for 0.4 seconds → Open for 0.4 seconds → Closed for 0.4 seconds → Open for 2 seconds → Closed" as one round, each At the opening timing of, the launch instruction commands of "2", "2", and "3" are transmitted to the sub-control board S side.
(4) In addition, when multiple types of closing times are provided (for example, "1 second", "4 seconds", "6 seconds", etc.) as well as the opening time of the large winning opening, the time related to the closing. May also be configured so that it can be transmitted as a launch instruction command from the main control board M side. In such a configuration, in the closing time, which is a relatively long opening time, "4 seconds" and "6 seconds", "waiting for opening", "○ seconds until opening", etc., respectively. May be configured to display the effect on the effect display device SG. With this configuration, in order to correspond to the time of the production performed during the big hit, even if the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds is long, the big winning opening will not open ( That is, in a disadvantageous state in which the number of balls is not increased), the player can be notified not to uselessly shoot the game ball. Further, the launch instruction command may be configured to be set at the end of the round (when the open timer value = 0 or when a predetermined number of prizes are won in the large winning opening).
(5) In addition, the command related to the recommended launch position during the jackpot can also be sent in binary, and the sub-control board S side can process the command so that the timing is adjusted in each round according to the jackpot type. ..

FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 (second) of FIG. 42 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1728-1, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probability variable jackpot symbol (a stop symbol related to a jackpot that shifts to a probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot, and this example. Then, it is determined whether or not it is 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1728-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1728-2. Next, in step 1728-3, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol without a time reduction (a stop symbol related to a jackpot that does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and in this example, 9A) It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 1728-3, in step 1728-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (65535 in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c. Here, by setting a sufficiently large value as the predetermined value A, the stochastic gaming state can be substantially continued until the next big hit. Since the time reduction counter MP52c is not subtracted in the game state in which the game state is a probability fluctuation game state according to the configuration of FIG. 40, the predetermined value A set here may be any value (predetermined value). Even if A is not set), the probability fluctuation game state continues until the next big hit.

Next, in step 1728-5, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the battle defeat probability change jackpot symbol (the stop symbol related to the jackpot that shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the jackpot ends. It is a big hit in which a defeated production is executed in the battle production during the big hit, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B). In the case of Yes in step 1728-5, in step 1728-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (60 in this example) to the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1728-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag and shifts to step 1728-11. On the other hand, even if No in step 1728-5, the process proceeds to step 1728-11. If No in step 1728-1, that is, if the stop symbol of the main game symbol is 2A, 4A, 6A, 2B, 4B, or 6B, in step 1728-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set. , The number of time reductions based on the jackpot symbol (20 times for 2A / 2B, 40 times for 4A / 4B, 60 times for 6A / 6B) is set in the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1728-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the same value as the time reduction number set in the time reduction counter MP52c (20 times, 40 times, or 60 times in this example) to the limited frequency A counter MN52c. Set to -1. Next, in step 1728-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag and shifts to step 1728-11. Next, in steps 1728-11 and 1728-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and the next process {step 1645 (second). Process}. Even if No in 1728-3, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1645 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (second) of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M preferably has an opening pattern related to the round (the small hit game) {an opening pattern similar to the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of a short opening big hit, for example. , "Opening for 1.8 seconds-> Closing for 0.5 seconds" is repeated 3 times, and the opening pattern A (the closing time after the last opening is not provided), etc.} is set. Next, in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1809, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first large winning opening C10 and starts the opening timer for the small hit game. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side). It is preferable that the small hit game is configured to perform the same effect as during the special game. Next, in step 1811, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a launch instruction command (command to the sub side) at the start of the small hit game, and proceeds to step 1814. On the other hand, if No in step 1802, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1812, the process proceeds to step 1814.

Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes have been won in the first large winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1814, the process proceeds to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the opening timer for the small hit game and refers to the predetermined time related to the opening of the large winning opening (for example, “opening for 1.8 seconds →”. It is determined whether or not the closure) has elapsed after repeating "closing for 0.5 seconds" three times. If Yes in step 1816, the process proceeds to step 1818.

Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops driving the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d and closes the first special winning opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit game timer. Next, in step 1822, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1823, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side). Next, in step 1824, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a firing instruction command (command to the sub control board S side) at the end of the small hit game. Next, in step 1825, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1825, in step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag. Next, in step 1830, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency B counter to a predetermined number of times (10 in this example), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910). Even if No in step 1812, step 1816, or step 1825, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910).

It should be noted that, after the end of the small hit game, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency B state on condition that the game is not in the time shortening game state, but the limitation is not limited to this, and the limited frequency state may not be changed. Depending on the winning symbol, it may be different whether or not to shift to the limited frequency state. Also, as a big hit, for example, the number of execution rounds is 2 rounds, and the opening pattern of "1.8 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed" is performed twice in the first round, and "1.8 seconds open" in the second round. Is a big hit that executes the opening pattern once (the closing time after the last opening of each round is not provided), and a big hit that shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit is provided, that is, a big hit over two rounds in the big hit. The opening mode (appearance opening and closing) of the winning opening is configured to be the same as the opening mode (appearing opening and closing) of the big winning opening in the small hit, and the limited frequency state after the end of the big hit and after the end of the small hit. It may be configured so that it can be migrated to. With such a configuration, at the end of the big hit and the small hit, the player cannot recognize which is the gaming state (whether or not it is the probability-variable gaming state), and is currently in the limited frequency state. By executing an effect of suggesting or notifying the gaming state of, it is possible to realize a game property that suggests the current gaming state while the symbol is changing.

Next, FIG. 46 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 2700 (second) and step 2750 (second), that is, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executed the special game-related display control process. Later, in step 1700 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the launch position notification control process described later. Next, in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stay stage determination process described later, and shifts to the process of step 2020.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the process in the figure is common to both the process related to the effect during the special game and the process related to the effect during the small hit. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 2550 (second), that is, in step 2612, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winnings, step 2550 (second). In 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special gaming effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2614.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the special in-game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) of FIG. 47 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the jackpot on the first main game side is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a battle execution jackpot symbol (a symbol related to a jackpot in which a battle effect is executed during the jackpot, and in this example, 2A / 3A. -Determine whether or not the jackpot according to 4A, 5A, 6A) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a battle victory jackpot symbol (a symbol related to a jackpot in which a winning effect is executed in a battle effect during a big hit, and in this example, 3A. -Determine whether or not the jackpot according to 5A) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2556, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute the battle victory effect, and proceeds to step 2568. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2554 (that is, when the symbol related to the big hit being executed is 7A / 9A), in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the big hit symbol without time reduction (non-time after the end of the big hit). It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to the shortened game state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 9A). In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S ends the reverse probability variation transition effect (for example, when the first round ends, the big hit or the small hit ends on the effect display device SG. After the effect that the screen display explodes is executed, the characters "Probability change confirmed!" Are displayed. After that, the game is played in the second and subsequent rounds. The command to execute (the blessing effect to congratulate the person is executed) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2568. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562 (that is, 7A in this example), in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S provides a blessing effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game). Set the command to be executed, and move to step 2568. If No in step 2556, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in a state of not notifying the battle defeat effect (the transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game), and after the end of the special game. A command to execute (may be configured to execute the effect depending on whether the player shifts to the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2568. Further, even if No in step 2552, the process proceeds to step 2568.

Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the jackpot on the second main game side is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a jackpot symbol after the battle victory (a jackpot symbol in which the post-battle victory effect is executed during the execution of the special game, and in this example, 5B. It is determined whether or not the jackpot according to 7B) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2570, in step 2572, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a production after the battle victory (a production executed during the big hit of the second main game side won in the probability fluctuation game state, and the big hit. Set a command to execute a command to congratulate the player, which is executed when the player shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end, and the process proceeds to step 2576. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2570, that is, when the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot being executed is 2B, 3B, 4B, 6B, in step 2574, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is produced after the battle is defeated (probability fluctuation). It is an effect executed during the big hit of the second main game side won in the game state, and is executed in both the case of shifting to the probability variable gaming state and the case of shifting to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the big hit. It is an effect to be obtained, for example, "Evening stage rush!" Is displayed. If a special game end demo time is provided, "Evening stage rush!" May be displayed at the end demo time). Set the command to be executed, and move to step 2576. On the other hand, even if No in step 2568, the process proceeds to step 2576. Here, in the second embodiment, in the probability fluctuation game state, the game state that shifts after the end of the winning jackpot is notified by the effect during the symbol variation related to the jackpot symbol, specifically. Is executed during the symbol fluctuation time related to the jackpot symbol, and if the battle effect is won, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol ends, and if the battle effect is defeated, the jackpot After the big hit related to the symbol is completed, the game shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state. In this way, since the player is aware of the gaming state after the jackpot ends when the jackpot is executed, during the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol on the second main game side that was won in the probability fluctuation gaming state, It is configured so that the effect of inciting the game state that shifts after the end of the big hit is not executed. Next, in step 2576, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a small hit is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2576, in step 2578, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a small hit medium effect (an effect executed during the small hit, for example, "empty stage" rush! If an end demo time is provided, a command to execute "Entering an empty stage!" May be displayed at the end demo time) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2614). Even if No in step 2576, the process proceeds to step 2614.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2747-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the content of the launch instruction command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2747-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the launch instruction command is related to right-handed strike. In the case of Yes in step 2747-2, in step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the first broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG. Here, the "notification image" is an effect of notifying the player of the launch direction and intensity of the game ball recommended to the player, and the game area to be launched, and mainly when the state (situation) of the game changes. {At the start of the big hit, at the transition of the game state, at the end of the big hit, etc.}, for example, "right-handed", "left-handed", "return to left-handed", "aim for the big winning opening", It is an image which informs such as "Aim at V (specific area C22)". Next, in step 2747-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the second broadcast image in the effect display device SG.

As a specific example of the configuration related to other broadcast images applicable to this example, the right to start the jackpot can be temporarily held until the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped). After that, when the jackpot is not started until the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10), the player is notified to launch the game ball toward the specific area (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10). It may be configured to do so.

Here, the configuration of the broadcast image according to this example will be described in detail.
(1) Of the broadcast images, the first broadcast image is an image displayed in the entire vicinity of the center of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. In the first notification image (right-handed), an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG, and it is easy to enter the ball by right-handed in a situation where the game should be played by left-handed. It will be displayed by detecting the entry into a ball entry opening (for example, a general winning opening) that is difficult to enter by hitting the left side. In addition, the first notification image (left-handed) is such that a left-pointing arrow is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG, and the ball is entered by left-handed in a situation where the game should be played by left-handed. It will be displayed by detecting the entry into the entry opening (for example, the first main game start opening), which is easy to enter and difficult to enter by right-handed hitting. In addition, the first notification image shows the launch position recommended at the game state transition timing (particularly, the launch position recommended at the change timing of the game state when the recommended launch position is changed (left-handed to right-handed, right-handed to left-handed, etc.)). It plays a role of notifying, and the display is erased when a predetermined effect time has elapsed or when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (a notification image that is not always displayed). (2) Of the notification images, the second notification image is an image displayed in a band shape in the upper right portion of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and is in a time-reduced gaming state or during execution of a special game (the gaming state is). It is a notification image that is always displayed during a specific game period such as (non-time reduction game state). In addition, the second right-handed notification image (left-handed) may be displayed (for example, in the right flow path) when the left-handed state in the non-time-reduced game state in which the special game is not executed should be executed. When the arranged second main game start port electric accessory B11d operates).
(3) Of the notification images, the third notification image is an image displayed in a band shape at the upper and lower ends of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and is mainly a notification that is always displayed during the execution of the special game. It is an image. In this embodiment, the third notification image is displayed during the special game, but in other embodiments, the second notification image is displayed instead of the third notification image during the special game. (For example, when the large winning opening is in the open state, the third notification image is displayed, and when it is in the closed period, the second notification image is displayed, etc.).
(4) Of the broadcast images, the "fourth broadcast image" is displayed in a range relatively smaller than the first broadcast image and the second broadcast image in the lower left of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. It is an image, and the right-pointing arrow and the left-pointing arrow are arranged one above the other. Further, the fourth notification image is an image that is basically always displayed not only immediately after the change of the game state or during a specific game period, and is not limited to the effect display device SG, but is displayed on other effect displays. It may be provided in the center decoration D38 as a position that does not become invisible, for example, as the above-mentioned launch instruction display unit HS, or may be installed in the first main game symbol display device A20. In addition, the fourth notification image is the situation of the game that should be fired by right-handed hitting, but the period during which the player does not actually benefit from right-handed hitting (for example, a big prize during the execution of the special game). During the closing period of the mouth), the fourth notification image is configured to be "hidden", "blinking display", or "display with the emission color or brightness and transmittance changed", and the "non-display" is used. If it is not "blinking display" or the like, it is always displayed as "right lighting" or "left lighting".
(5) Of the broadcast images, the fifth broadcast image is an image displayed in the entire vicinity of the center of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. In the fifth notification image (left-handed), a left-pointing arrow with the characters "left-handed" (a diagonal striped texture is pasted) is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is a mode, and in a situation where a game should be played with a left-handed hit, it is easy to enter a ball with a right-handed hit and difficult to enter with a left-handed hit (for example, a right-side general winning opening, a right-side auxiliary game start opening, the first 2 It will be displayed by detecting a predetermined number A within a predetermined period A of the ball entering the main game start port). In addition, in the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow with the characters "right-handed" (a diagonal striped texture is pasted) is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. In the situation where the game should be played by hitting right, it is easy to enter the ball by hitting left and difficult to enter by hitting right (for example, the first main game start opening, general prize on the left side). It will be displayed by detecting a predetermined number B of balls entering the mouth) within a predetermined period B. The fifth notification image plays a role of warning or alerting, and the display is erased when the cause of the warning is resolved (the notification image is not always displayed).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 2747-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S newly enters the first main game start opening ball entry detection command (the first main game start opening A10 has entered the ball). It is a command related to this, and it is easier to enter the ball at the first main game start port A10 when the player is hitting the left side than when the player is hitting the right side). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2747-4, in step 2747-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the fifth broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG. It should be noted that the fifth broadcast image is deleted after a predetermined period (for example, 3 to 10 seconds later) has elapsed after the display (in the period when the fifth broadcast image is displayed). The display of the first broadcast image that was displayed is erased). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may determine that the player is firing the game ball at a normal firing position, for example, when the sub-control board S side determines, or when the game state or the like shifts. When the launch position of is a normal launch position, it may be deleted, or a message such as "OK" may be displayed for the launch to the normal launch position. That is, the condition for ending the display of the fifth broadcast image may be appropriately changed according to the playability. Next, in step 2747-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other staging sound effects, outputs the voice "Right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R, and steps 2747-. Move to 7. On the other hand, even if No in step 2747-4, the process proceeds to step 2747-7. Next, in step 2747-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the wasteful hitting condition is satisfied. Here, the wasteful hitting condition is, for example, the time between rounds during a big hit, the big hit start demo time, the big hit end demo time, and the counter of the time reduction counter MP52c during a round in which the opening pattern of the big winning opening is a short opening pattern. Time reduction when the value becomes 0 Even if the game ball is fired by hitting right, such as during the fixed time of fluctuation after the final change of the game state, the ball does not enter the big winning opening, at the second main game start opening. It is configured to satisfy when it is not advantageous for the player, such as not entering the ball. The situation judgment regarding these wasteful hits is made by the main control board M with respect to the sub control board S at the start and end of the big hit, at the start and end of each round, and at the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Judgment is made based on the appropriate reception of information such as the start and end of operation and the end of symbol change.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2747-7, in step 2747-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the fourth broadcast image in "non-lighting", and the next process {step 2750. (2) processing}. In the second embodiment, the situation of the game should be fired by right-handed hitting, but the period during which the right-handed hit does not benefit the player (for example, the big winning opening during the execution of the special game). In the closed period), the fourth broadcast image is configured to be "hidden", but the display mode of the fourth display image is not limited to this, and can be distinguished from "right lighting", and further, " It suffices if the display mode is such that it can be recognized that the profit will not be higher when the game ball is fired by hitting right than in the case of "lighting right". It may be configured to be displayed by "blinking" or the like. On the other hand, if No in step 2747-7, in step 2747-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the fourth broadcast image by "lighting right", and the next process {step. 2750 (second) process}. Further, in the case of No in step 2747-2, that is, when the launch instruction command is related to left-handed striking, in step 2748-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends the first notification image (1st notification image) to the effect display device SG. Set a command to display (left-handed). Next, in step 2747-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a new general winning opening entry detection command (a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the general winning opening P10 provided on the right side of the board, and is a general winning entry. It is determined whether or not the ball is easily entered into the mouth P10 when the player is hitting the right side and the ball is hitting the mouth P10 more easily than when the player is hitting the left side. In the case of Yes in step 2747-10, in step 2747-11, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the fifth broadcast image (left-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2747-12, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other staging sound effects, outputs a voice of "left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L, and steps 2747-. Move to 13. As described above, in the second embodiment, when suggesting that the game ball is launched by left-handed in the fifth notification image, the sound is output from the speaker left D24L and right-handed in the second notification image. When suggesting to launch a game ball, it is configured to output sound from the speaker right D24R, that is, the game ball should be fired visually and audibly by right-handed (left-handed). It is configured so that it can be recognized. On the other hand, even if No in step 2747-10, the process proceeds to step 2747-13. Next, in step 2747-13, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the fourth broadcast image by "left-handed", and shifts to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}. do. As described above, in the second embodiment, as the display mode of the first notification image, the second notification image, and the fourth implementation image, an image instructing right-handed stroke and an image instructing left-handed stroke can be displayed. Has been done. In this example, it is determined that the player is performing the game by hitting the right side by entering the ball into the general winning opening P10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the passage of the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is the first. 2 The configuration may be determined by entering the ball into the main game start port B10.

Next, on the right side of the figure, the notification images (first notification image, second notification image, fourth notification image (lighting right), fourth notification image (lighting left), and fourth notification image according to the second embodiment are shown. This is an example of (non-lighting), the fifth notification image (left-handed), and the fifth notification image (right-handed). The images related to the first notification image and the second notification image that instruct left-handing are omitted. First, the first notification image should launch a game ball at the center of the effect display device SG by hitting the player with a right-handed motion in a range (area) relatively larger than the second notification image. On the other hand, the second notification image is an image that notifies the player that the player should hit right in a relatively small range on the upper right side of the effect display device SG from the first notification image. Yes, even if other effects (variation of decorative patterns and battle effects) are executed in the center, it is a mode that does not easily overlap (a mode that does not hinder the visibility of other effects), and the recommended launch position. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the notification is completely invisible (or the period in which the notification is invisible can be shortened as much as possible), and for the fourth notification image, the first is in the lower left of the effect display device SG. It is an image displayed in a range relatively smaller than the broadcast image and the second broadcast image, and has a mode in which a right-pointing arrow and a left-pointing arrow are arranged vertically. More specifically, (1) first. In the image displaying the normal right-handed instruction in the 4 notification image, the arrow on the right side is lit. (2) Normally in the 4th notification image during the execution of the special game or the time reduction game. In the image displaying the left-handed instruction of the above, the arrow on the left side is lit. (3) Further, when the wasteful hitting condition is satisfied (for example, the above-mentioned condition is satisfied, the player plays the game. The mode displayed in (when there is almost no possibility that the player can make a profit when the ball is fired) is a mode in which none of the arrows lights up, and the fourth notification image (lights up on the right). And the fourth notification image (lit on the left) clearly indicates the position where the game ball should be launched to the player, whereas the fourth notification image (lights on the left) is a passive mode in which the position where the game ball should be launched is not notified. The fourth notification image is also in a mode that does not easily overlap with other effects that can be displayed in the center, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the notification of the recommended firing position is completely invisible (or invisible). The possible period can be shortened as much as possible.) Note that the mode of the fourth broadcast image is not limited to this example, and for example, in one place, the arrow on the right side (may be a right-handed character or the like), the left side. Image (left) (It may be a character of hitting) is displayed so as to switch, and if the wasteful hitting condition is satisfied, the display may disappear, or the player may be satisfied with the wasteful hitting condition as a gray scale or blinking display. It may be configured to notify the presence. Further, even if the image is intended to display such a constantly notified image, in the case of super reach or the like, the image may be hidden to further arouse the player's feeling of exhilaration. On the other hand, it is also possible to always notify right-handed and left-handed hits without providing a display for preventing such wasteful hits. In addition, in the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow (with a diagonal striped texture pasted) with the characters "right-handed" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is an aspect to be done. In addition, in the fifth notification image (left-handed), a left-pointing arrow (with a diagonal striped texture pasted) with the characters "left-handed" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is an aspect to be done. The fifth notification image plays a role of warning and alerting.

With the above configuration, when the player executes the game by hitting the left in the situation where the game should be hit right in the progress of the game, the notification image is more positive in the processing on the sub-control board S side. Can be configured to display, and when instructing right-handed strike, a sound instructing right-handed strike is output from the speaker right D24R provided on the right side, while when instructing left-handed strike, the voice instructing right-handed strike is output. , The speaker left D24L provided on the left side is configured to output a voice instructing left strike, and the player is firing the game ball at an inappropriate (wrong) firing position. Can be visually recognized and intuitively recognized by hearing. It should be noted that these sounds are output on the same CH by being configured to be output on a CH different from the normal BGM and the production sound (output on a speaker different from the speaker that outputs the BGM). In this case, by synthesizing with the effect sound, it is possible to prevent a problem that the volume becomes too loud momentarily, an abnormality occurs in the speaker, and the player cannot be notified. In addition, since only one of the left and right speakers switches the CH to a dedicated one, it is possible to output the production sound on the other side, and it is possible to prevent the sound related to the production from being interrupted and the entertainment of the game from being lowered. be able to. It should be noted that the player may be configured to output sound from both speakers D24 in the notification when the game ball is being fired at an inappropriate (wrong) firing position. As an example, the fifth notification image, which is a notification image when it is desired to emphasize the notification such as when warning the player, outputs sound from both the speaker right D24R and the speaker left D24L to the player. On the other hand, the second notification image, which is the notification image when it is desired to notify without emphasizing (for the purpose of instructing only), is output from only the speaker right D24R for the second notification image (right-handed), and the second notification image (2nd notification image). Left-handed) may be configured to output only from the speaker left D24L. With such a configuration, when displaying the second notification image for which the warning is not the purpose, by matching the firing direction and the direction of the voice output, it helps to understand the progress of the game, while the warning is issued. The target fifth broadcast image can reliably notify (warn) the player even if a problem occurs in either the speaker right D24R or the speaker left D24L (for example, left-handed strike). If you make a right-handed strike while cheating on the speaker left D24L when it is configured to output sound only from the speaker left D24L when warning to do so, the effect sound is output from the speaker right D24R and the game is played normally. Can be prevented from appearing to be in progress). In addition, if the player does not detect the inappropriate launch of the game ball under the situation where the player should hit left, the second notification image is not displayed, while the first notification image and the first are relatively. In the 4th display image, which is less conspicuous than the 2 notification image and the 5th notification image, it is possible to continuously notify that the right-handed image should be hit.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when the special game ends (wins), the timing when the game state shifts, (same). It may be the timing at which the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the gaming state of), the timing at which the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (even in the same gaming state), etc.}. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game in which the command for executing the battle defeat effect from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767. If No in step 2754, in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the limited frequency B command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an “empty stage” as a stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767. If No in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2762 whether or not the game is in the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “space stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767. Further, in the case of No in step 2762, in other words, in the case of the non-time reduction gaming state, in step 2766, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “ground stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767. Next, in step 2767, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command to the sub-sub control board side that specifies the display presence / absence of the notification image, the type of the notification image to be displayed, and the display position of the notification image. When the sub-sub control board receives the command, the notification image is displayed on the effect display device SG), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). Even if No in step 2752, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020). In this way, after the end of the big hit in which the battle defeat effect is executed during the big hit (there may be a non-probability variable game state and a time-reduced game state, or a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state). When the "evening stage" is set and the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit, and the battle defeat effect is not executed during the big hit (during the big hit, the battle victory effect or blessing) The "space stage" is set after the big hit (after the production is executed), and the "empty stage" is set after the small hit (after receiving the command to execute the small hit medium production). In the case of a non-time reduction game state (including after the end of the big hit related to the big hit symbol without time reduction), the "ground stage" is set, that is, the stop symbol of the main game symbol and the special game state. It is configured so that the set stay stage differs depending on the game state after the end of.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game state that shifts after the end of the big hit, the number of time reductions given, and the number of rounds executed during the big hit are determined by the stop symbol related to the big hit. It is configured differently, and based on the information from the main control board M side, the display that guides the player to the correct progress of the game at an appropriate timing by the processing on the sub control board S side (especially right-handed). It is a user-friendly model for players, as it can display instructions to encourage left-handed strikes.

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
Based on the information from the main control board M side, the display that guides the player to proceed with the correct game at an appropriate timing by the processing on the sub control board S side (particularly, the instruction display that prompts right-handed and left-handed) is displayed. The mode is not limited to this, and another mode of processing on the sub-control board S side will be described in detail only as a change from the second embodiment as a change example 1 from the second embodiment.

First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2150 (second variation 1) and step 2250 (second variation 1), that is, in step 2747-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device. After setting the command to display the second broadcast image in SG, in step 2150 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the right-handed image display control process described later, and in step 2747-7. Transition. Further, in the case of No in step 2747-2, in other words, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the launch instruction command is related to left-handed striking, in step 2250 (second change 1), the sub-control board The CPUSC of S executes the left-handed image display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2747-13.

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the right-handed image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second variation 1) of FIG. 51 in the modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first start port confirmation flag (flag for monitoring the ball entry rate of the first main game start port A10) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new first main game start opening ball entry detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the first start port confirmation flag. Next, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is used as a first start port confirmation timer MP21t (a timer that manages a period for monitoring the ball entry rate to the first main game start port A10 and is a decrement timer). A predetermined value (30 seconds in this example) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 2164. On the other hand, if No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S newly issues the first main game start port entry detection command (under the situation where the first start port confirmation flag is on). Determine if it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the first start port entry rate counter MP61c, and proceeds to step 2164.

Next, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the first starting port entry rate counter MP61c is smaller than the notification value (two in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2164, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the first start port confirmation timer MP21t is 0. If Yes in step 2166, the process proceeds to step 2171. On the other hand, if No in step 2164, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the first broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other staging sound effects, outputs the voice "Right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R, and proceeds to step 2171. do. Next, in step 2171, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the first starting port entry rate counter MP61c to zero. Next, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the first start port confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7). Even if No in step 2154 or 2166, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-7).

With the above configuration, in a situation where a right-handed player should be hit in the progress of the game, a predetermined number (3 in this example) of entering the first main game start port within a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example). When there is a ball (that is, when the game is executed by hitting left), the effect display device SG displays the first notification image in addition to the second notification image, and the speaker right D24R displays the right. It is possible to output a hitting instruction. In this way, if the player mistakenly fires the game ball on the left side and immediately returns to right-handed, even though he / she recognizes that he / she should play right-handed, the above notification is executed. On the other hand, it is configured so that the above notification as a warning (notification by the first notification image) can be executed only when the player continues the left-handed game with the intention of continuing the left-handed game. There is. The predetermined value set in the first start port confirmation timer MP21t and the value of the notification value (two in this example) are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed depending on the configuration of the gaming machine and the like. Further, the requirement for executing the above warning (notification) is not limited to this example. For example, as a method for the sub-control board S side to recognize that the player is performing a left-handed strike, (1) the general winning opening P10 is provided with the general winning opening P10 on the left side of the game area D30. It may be configured to detect left-handed hitting by the provided general winning opening ball entry detection device P11s, or (2) left-handed hitting by providing a sensor at any position where the game ball on the left side of the game area D30 flows down. It may be configured to detect. Further, as a method of counting game balls, (A) a timer process for measuring a predetermined period is repeatedly executed, and there is an inappropriate entry (or passage) of a plurality of game balls within any of the periods. This may be a requirement, or (B) it may be configured to require that a predetermined number of inappropriate balls have entered (or passed) without executing the timer process. In the case of (B) above, the counter may be configured to be cleared when the power is turned off, when the standby demo is shifted, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the determination of these requirements is processed on the sub-control board S side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be performed on the main control board M side. In addition, when the above-mentioned requirement for executing the notification is satisfied, the notification is configured to be performed immediately, but the notification is not limited to this, and only the flag indicating that the requirement is satisfied is turned on and the notification image is displayed. If this is not appropriate, the broadcast image may be displayed after the situation is resolved. For example, when it is considered that the display of the notification image does not look good, such as during reach, the notification may be executed after the reach is completed. Further, it may be configured not to count the entry of the above-mentioned inappropriate game ball itself during the reach, and a specific determination period (for example, during the temporary stop of the symbol, immediately before the start of the symbol variation, during the variable fixed time, etc.) may be configured. ) Only, it may be configured to count the incoming balls of inappropriate game balls (for example, one ball). The configuration of immediate notification is more suitable from the viewpoint of the disadvantage of the player, while the mode of turning on the flag and notifying later concentrates on the reach production and reduces the influence on the entertainment of the production. From the point of view, it is suitable. It should be noted that during the reach effect, immediate notification may be given in a small and inconspicuous manner, and the mode may be switched to a conspicuous mode after the reach effect is completed.

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the left-handed image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second variation 1) of FIG. 51 in the modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has whether or not the general winning opening confirmation flag (flag for monitoring the winning rate of the general winning opening P10 arranged on the right side of the game board) is off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new general winning opening ball entry detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the general winning opening confirmation flag. Next, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined value (this is a timer for managing the period for monitoring the entry rate to the general winning opening P10) of the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t (the decrement timer). In the example, 10 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2252, in step 2260, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S newly received the general winning opening confirmation command (under the situation where the general winning opening confirmation flag is turned on). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2260, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the general winning opening entrance rate counter MP62c, and proceeds to step 2264.

Next, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the general winning opening ball entry rate counter MP62c is smaller than the notification value (two in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t is 0. If Yes in step 2266, the process proceeds to step 2271. On the other hand, if No in step 2264, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the first broadcast image (left-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other staging sound effects, outputs a voice of "left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L, and proceeds to step 2217. do. Next, in step 2271, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the general winning opening ball entry rate counter MP62c to zero. Next, in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the general winning opening confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-13). Even if No in step 2254 or 2266, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-13). In addition, in FIGS. 52 and 53, the first notification image is displayed when a predetermined number of balls have been entered in the first main game start opening or the general winning opening in a predetermined period. The fifth notification image may be displayed for the purpose of doing so.

With the above configuration, in a situation where a left-handed hit should be made in the progress of the game, a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) to the general winning opening P10 provided on the right side of the game area D30 from the player's point of view. In addition to the second notification image, the first notification image is displayed on the effect display device SG when a predetermined number (three in this example) of balls are entered, and the speaker left D24L hits the left. The voice of the instruction can be output. In this way, if the player mistakenly shoots the game ball to the right side while recognizing that the player should play left-handed and immediately returns to left-handed, the above notification is difficult to be executed, and the player The above notification as a warning can be executed only when the player continues the right-handed game with the intention of continuing the right-handed game. The predetermined value set in the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t and the value of the notification value are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed depending on the configuration of the gaming machine and the like. Further, the requirement for executing the above warning (notification) is not limited to this example. For example, as a method for the sub-control board S side to recognize that the player is performing a right-handed strike, (1) a sensor may be provided at any position on the right side of the game area D30 where the game ball flows down. Alternatively, it may be assumed that (2) the ball has entered (or passed) into the auxiliary game starting port H10 and the second main game starting port B10. Further, as a requirement for notification, (A) timer processing for a predetermined period may be repeatedly executed, and it may be a requirement that a plurality of inappropriate game balls have entered (or passed) within each period. However, (B) it may be configured to require that a predetermined number of inappropriate balls have entered (or passed) without executing the timer process. In addition, (C) the case where the information that the number of reservations on the auxiliary game side has reached a predetermined value or more (for example, two or more) is received as a command from the main control board M can be mentioned (assisted only on the right side of the game board). Limited to the configuration in which the game start port is arranged). In the case of (B) above, the counter can be configured to be cleared when the power is turned off, when the standby demo is shifted, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. In the case of controlling as in (C), the auxiliary game Even if one or two balls happen to pass through the starting port H10, the information that is the notification condition is automatically subtracted by changing the symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, so that it is not necessary to provide a separate counter. .. Further, the determination of these requirements is processed on the sub-control board S side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be performed on the main control board M side. In addition, when the above-mentioned requirement for executing the notification is satisfied, the notification is configured to be performed immediately, but the notification is not limited to this, and only the flag indicating that the requirement is satisfied is turned on and the notification image is displayed. If this is not appropriate, the broadcast image may be displayed after the situation is resolved. For example, when it is considered that the display of the notification image does not look good, such as during the reach effect, the notification may be executed after the reach effect is completed. Further, during the reach, the above-mentioned inappropriate game ball entry itself may not be counted, or a specific determination period (for example, during the temporary stop of the symbol, immediately before the start of the symbol change, during the fixed change time). It may be configured to count incoming balls only (for example, one ball). The configuration of immediate notification is more suitable from the viewpoint of the disadvantage of the player, while the mode of turning on the flag and notifying later concentrates on the reach production and reduces the influence on the entertainment of the production. From the point of view, it is suitable. It should be noted that during the reach effect, immediate notification may be given in a small and inconspicuous manner, and the mode may be switched to a conspicuous mode after the reach effect is completed.

As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the player accidentally launches the game ball with an inappropriate firing intensity, it is normal as long as the launching of the inappropriate game ball is not continued. It is possible to make a user-friendly model by configuring the notification so as not to execute the notification that prompts the game by the firing strength of the game ball and preventing the notification from becoming an excessive notification for the player.

In the first modification from the second embodiment, the first notification image is displayed when a predetermined number of inappropriate numbers of game balls are detected during a predetermined period, but it is inappropriate. The mode of monitoring the entry of a game ball is not limited to this, and for example, when one ball is entered into a certain entry opening, a predetermined period is set as a preparation period from the entry timing, and the preparation period is set. It may be configured to notify an error when a predetermined number of balls are detected. Further, it is configured to execute the monitoring procedure of the improper ball entry on the sub control board S side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the improper ball entry is detected by the processing on the main control board M side. It may be configured to determine whether or not and transmit the determination information to the sub-control board S side.

(Third Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the player is notified by processing on the sub-control board S side based on the information (command) from the main control board M side in response to the player's inappropriate launch of the game ball in the progress of the game. The configuration for notifying the player to interrupt the launch of the game ball with respect to the useless launch of the game ball, which is disadvantageous to the player, has been described in detail, but such a configuration is not limited to this. Another aspect of preventing the launch of the game ball, which is wasteful for the player, will be described in detail below only with respect to the difference from the second embodiment.

First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is in step 1110 (third), that is, in step 1108, after the CPUMC of the main control board M adds one auxiliary game holding ball, in step 1110 (third). , The CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an auxiliary game hold number command (information related to the number of holds on the auxiliary game side in which the number of hold balls has increased, and is a command transmitted to the sub-control board S side), and the next process is performed. (Processing in step 1200).

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are step 1223 (third), step 1231-1 (third) to step 1233-1 (third), and step 1245 (third), that is, step. At 1222, after the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the auxiliary game holding ball and starts the change of the auxiliary game symbol according to the above determination, in step 1223 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines. Auxiliary game hold number command (information related to the number of hold on the auxiliary game side where the hold ball has been digested, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1224. Further, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1230 that the auxiliary game stop symbol is a hit symbol (“D1” or “D2”), in step 1231-1 (third), the main control board. The CPUMC of M determines whether or not the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1231-1 (third), in step 1231-2 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the auxiliary game stop symbol as the long open hit symbol {the first of the auxiliary game side hit symbols. 2 The opening period of the main game start port electric accessory B11d (in the case of opening multiple times, it may be the longest one opening period or the total opening period) is relatively long (particularly, assistance). (When the game time reduction flag is off) It is a hit symbol, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is "D2"}. In the case of Yes in step 1231-2 (third), in step 1233-1 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the electric accessory release command (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is released). This is a command related to the information to that effect, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1232. In addition, even if No in step 1231-1 (third) or step 1231-2 (third), the process proceeds to step 1232. The timing of setting the electric accessory release command is not limited to this, and the command may be set at a timing before the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side is stopped and displayed. As an example, it may be configured to be set at a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) before the stop display timing during the symbol change related to the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to launch the game ball toward the second main game start port electric accessory B11d before the opening timing of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. It is possible to make a user-friendly gaming machine in consideration of the time from launching the gaming ball to reaching the second main gaming opening electric accessory B11d. Further, in step 1244, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, and then in step 1245 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the electric accessory closing command. (A command related to the information that the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1246. It should be noted that the electric accessory opening command is set only when the opening mode of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is a long period of time (for example, an opening mode of 5 seconds and easy entry of the game ball). It may be configured to do so. Further, in consideration of the period of flowing down on the game board D35, the timing of transmission of the electric accessory opening command and the electric accessory closing command (that is, the first notification image is displayed or the first notification is displayed as described later). The second main game start port electric accessory B11d may be configured to open and close after a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) from the timing at which the image is erased. With such a configuration, from the launch of the game ball toward the second main game start port electric accessory B11d until the launched game ball reaches the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. The first notification image can be displayed in consideration of the period, and when the player visually recognizes the first notification image, the game ball is launched toward the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. By the time the fired game ball reaches the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, it prevents the situation where a predetermined period has passed since the second main game start port electric accessory B11d started to open. can do.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1314 (third) and step 1334 (third), that is, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the third to the sub control board S side. 1 After setting the hold generation command of the main game content determination random number, in step 1314 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the first main game hold number command (the hold number on the first main game side). Information on the number of reserved numbers on the first main game side that is set again, and a command) to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side is set, and the process proceeds to step 1322. In step 1332, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the hold generation command of the second main game content determination random number to the sub control board S side, in step 1334 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set. , 2nd main game hold number command (information on the hold number of the 2nd main game side set when the hold number of the 2nd main game side is added, and a command transmitted to the sub control board S side) Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400}.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1407 (third) and step 1408 (third), that is, in step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads out the main game side random number. Is deleted from the hold information and the remaining hold information is shifted (hold digest), and then in step 1408 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives a hold number command (secondary control board) related to the held hold. It is a command to the S side, it is the first main game hold number command when the hold of the first main game side is exhausted, and it is the second main game when the hold of the second main game side is exhausted. The hold count command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1410-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407 (third), in other words, when the digested hold is the hold on the first main game side, step 1410 without performing the process of step 1408 (third). Move to -1.

Next, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) according to the third embodiment. Is. The difference from the second embodiment is that, especially when the lottery result on the main game side is a loss, the distribution of the variable time is different depending on the number of holdings existing. That is, when the number of holdings on the main game side is small, a relatively long fluctuation time is selected.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the third embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are steps 1627-1 (third) and 1627-2 (third). That is, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the game state information command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the special game, and then in step 1627-1 (third), the main control. The CPUMC of the substrate M determines whether or not the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) has won a notification number (9 in this example). That is, a predetermined number (in this example, closed when the number of winnings reaches 10) that the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) is closed by winning one later. In the example, 9) is set as the number of notifications, and it is determined whether or not the number of notifications has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1627-1 (third), in step 1627-2 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command immediately before closing {a command to the sub-control board S side, and the first (first). 2) Set a command to the effect that the large winning opening C10 (C20) is about to be closed}, and proceed to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, even in the case of No in step 1627-1 (third), the process proceeds to step 1628 (second) without setting the command immediately before closing.

With the above configuration, on the main control board M side, the timing immediately before the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) is closed based on the determination as to whether the number of winnings has reached a predetermined number. A command to that effect can be sent to the sub-control board side. The number of notifications is not limited to this example, and may be two less than the predetermined number, which is a condition for closing the large winning opening, or three less. In addition, as a configuration that can determine the number of game balls flowing down on the game board D35, "the number of game balls on the board + the number of game balls that have already entered the big winning opening ≥ the condition that the big winning opening is closed" When the requirement of "number (for example, 10)" is satisfied, the third notification image relating to the launch position is deleted from the effect display device SG, or the mode is switched (made into the second notification image). May be good. The opening pattern of the big winning opening is not limited to this example (for example, when the opening ending condition of the big winning opening is one ball entering, it is a condition to send a command immediately before closing at the same time as opening. , When designing the production for the purpose of surely acquiring (entering) the ball, design so as not to send the command immediately before closing, and if it is difficult to expect an increase in the number of balls, close with emphasis on the production. It can be appropriately designed, such as by transmitting the immediately preceding command and erasing / switching the third broadcast image.) Further, the command immediately before closing may be transmitted in accordance with the opening pattern (value of the timekeeping timer of opening time). Specifically, a command immediately before closing may be sent immediately before the large winning opening is closed (for example, 2 seconds before) based on the opening pattern, or immediately before closing due to winning the large winning opening as described above. It may be configured to be used in combination with a command. In addition, in the situation where the entry to the 9 large winning openings is confirmed (for example, the game ball on the board + the game ball that has already entered the large winning opening = 9), "Aim for over winning! It may be configured to display a notification image (a notification image suggesting to the player to aim for a predetermined number of balls, which is a condition for closing the large winning opening). In that case, if an over-winning occurs, it may be configured to perform an effect that congratulates the player. In the third embodiment, a command such as a command immediately before closing is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the notification image is displayed based on the command. Although it is configured to execute display control, information for determining the type of jackpot received from the main control board M side (big hit start demo command, etc.) and valid entry command in each round (valid entry for the big winning opening) Based on the command sent when a ball is detected, the command sent when a valid ball is detected in the right general winning slot), the sub-control board S determines the ball entry status to the big winning slot, etc. It may be configured to execute the determination according to the process of the third embodiment and determine the command to be output to the sub-sub control board.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 2650 (third), that is, when there is a new ball in the first main game start opening A10 or the general winning opening P10, step 2747-6. Or, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sound effects and outputs the voice "Right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R, or in step 2747-12. , BGM and other CHs different from the production sound effects are used, and after outputting the voice "Left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L, in step 2650 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is described later. The game assist effect display control process is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the game assist effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (third) of FIG. 60 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2651, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S may determine whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time shortening gaming state (whether or not the gaming state on the auxiliary game side is a non-time shortening gaming state). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2651, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the command immediately before closing from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the second broadcast image, and proceeds to the process of step 2656. On the other hand, even if No in step 2652, the process proceeds to step 2656. Next, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the electric accessory release command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG (the second notification image is continuously displayed. ), The process proceeds to step 2660. On the other hand, even if No in step 2656, the process proceeds to step 2660. Next, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the electric accessory closing command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2660, in step 2662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the first broadcast image (right-handed) (only the display of the second broadcast image), and the next The process proceeds to the process {process of step 2750 (second)}. On the other hand, even if No in step 2660, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

Further, in the case of No in step 2651, in other words, when the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state, in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the current second game based on the second main game hold number command. Check the number of main game pending. Next, in step 2672, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of second main game reservations is a predetermined number (1 in this example) or less. In the case of Yes in step 2672, in step 2674, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the first broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG, and the next process {step 2750 (second). }. Further, in the case of No in step 2672, in other words, when the number of second main game reservations is two or more, in step 2676, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display of the first notification image (right-handed). The command is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}. In this example, the first notification image (right-handed) is displayed when the number of the second main game hold is less than a predetermined number (1 in this example) in the time-reduced game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first notification image (right-handed) may be displayed when the number of auxiliary game reservations is a specific number (for example, one) or less in the time-reduced game state. In the figure, the first notification image is displayed when the number of the second main game hold is less than the predetermined number in the time shortened game state, but the second main game hold is set in the time shortened game state. If the game quality is such that the game performance is significantly impaired when the number is 0 (such as when it is disadvantageous for the player to make a big hit with the first main game symbol in the time-reduced game state), the second It is preferable to configure the notification image to be displayed when the number of main game reservations is equal to or less than the predetermined number as the fifth notification image.

With the above configuration, (1) the second notification image of right-handed or left-handed is deleted immediately before the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) is closed during the execution of the special game. , (2) The first notification image (right-handed) is displayed during the long opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d in the non-time reduction game state (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). 3) In the time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game is configured to display the first notification image (right-handed) when the number of second main game pending is less than or equal to a predetermined number (1 in this example). In the state, it is possible to assist the execution of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol without interruption, and it is possible to make the model user-friendly. The number of second main game hold, which is a condition for displaying or erasing the first notification image (right-handed), is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, two, or the number of second main game hold. It can be changed depending on the maximum number of pieces. Further, when the number of reserved second main games exceeds a predetermined number, the first notification image (right-handed) is deleted, but the first notification image (right-handed) is not limited to this. Timing that is useless when firing a game ball to the player by changing to a more passive display, for example, a black and white display, changing the position, size, etc. to make the display less conspicuous. It may be configured to display the fact that it is (the same configuration may be used for the number of reserved auxiliary games).

Further, only the requirement is that the number of second main game reservations is a predetermined number (for example, 2) or less, or the requirement is that the number of auxiliary game reservations is a predetermined number (for example, 1) or less. The fifth broadcast image may be displayed. As the timing of notification, when the immediate requirement is satisfied, the notification may be performed, or when the requirement is satisfied, the flag may be turned on and the notification may be performed from the start of the next fluctuation. Further, as a requirement for erasing, it is also possible to have a configuration in which erasing is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of holdings has reached the upper limit. In the case where the fifth broadcast image is configured to be erased after being displayed for a certain period of time, for example, when the number of holdings on the main game side is 0 and the number is variable on the second main game side, or the first main game side is changed. In the case of fluctuations with a relatively long fluctuation time, such as fluctuations on the game side, the period for displaying the fifth broadcast image is configured to be relatively long (for example, until the first stop timing of the decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the case of short-term fluctuations, the fifth broadcast image may be erased in a relatively short period (for example, 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds). In particular, when the second main game side is configured in favor of the player, there is no effect in the loss fluctuation of the first main game side, or the color of the fifth notification image related to right-handed movement is changed. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a remarkable difference is provided in order to make the fifth broadcast image stand out in the mode of the fifth broadcast image when the first main game side is changed and when the second main game side is changed. Further, in the case of super reach or the like, the fifth broadcast image may be erased, or as a passive mode, it may be configured so as not to reduce the interest of the production. It should be noted that, as a configuration for displaying the notification image together with the display of the reach and the like, the degree of expectation of the special game (the magnitude of the profit for the player, for example, the transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game). It may be configured to suggest the reliability by the difference in the color for displaying the expectation), or may be configured to suggest the reliability as a non-display when the reliability is high. When the mode is changed to suggest such reliability, the second broadcast image or the fifth broadcast image is changed to a passive mode (displayed in a small size, displayed in the corner of the effect display device SG, etc.). Therefore, it is preferable to use a mode that does not affect the interest of the production. In the second embodiment, the mode of displaying the notification image is determined on the sub-control board S side based on the information from the main control board M side, but the notification image is displayed on the main control board M side. The display and its mode may also be determined, and the information may be included and transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Further, in the game auxiliary effect display control process shown in FIG. 61, when the display of the first notification image is controlled based on the number of reserved balls related to the auxiliary game as described above, the auxiliary game symbol and the main Since the game symbol can change at the same time, the variation effect display of the main game symbol and the first notification displayed immediately after the notification condition of the first notification image related to the number of auxiliary game reservations is satisfied is satisfied. It may not be appropriate to display it on top of the image (for example, during reach production or when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). Therefore, the display of the first notification image according to the number of reserved balls for the auxiliary game is limited to setting a flag when the notification start condition is satisfied, and when the timing to be appropriately notified comes (for example, when the change of the next main game symbol starts). Etc.) is preferably controlled to start the notification. In addition, when controlling in this way, after the flag is turned on, when a big hit is started by the main game symbol that is changing at that time, or during the reach production period or the remaining variable period, the number of auxiliary game reserved balls By controlling the flag to be turned off when the number of images exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the first broadcast image from being displayed at an inappropriate timing.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters a predetermined entry port such as the first main game start opening or the general winning opening, an appropriate game ball is not launched along with the progress of the game. When it is determined that the notification image is displayed, the configuration is such that the notification image is displayed, but such a configuration is not limited to the second embodiment. As a configuration different from the second embodiment as a configuration for displaying a notification image when it is determined that an appropriate game ball has not been launched along the progress of the game, a configuration different from the second embodiment is set as the fourth embodiment and the second embodiment. Only the differences will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the fourth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 1627-3 (fourth), step 1627-4 (fourth), step 1633-1 (fourth), and step 1633-2 (fourth), ie. , In step 1626, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the game state information command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the special game, in step 1627-3 (fourth), the main control board. The CPUMC of M determines whether or not the ball has entered the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20). In the case of Yes in step 1627-3 (4th), in step 1627-4 (4th), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a round ball entry counter MP70c (a game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the round). 1 is added to the counter value of the counter) related to the number, and the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, even if No in step 1627-3 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). Further, in step 1632 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first (second) grand prize opening, and then in step 1633-1 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M is changed. A round number of balls entered command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a command related to the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening by the end of the round in each round) is set. Next, in step 1633-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the round ball entry counter MP70c to zero, and proceeds to step 1634.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (fourth) of FIG. 46 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2748-1, in step 2748-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the second broadcast image in the effect display device SG, and the next process {step 2750 (second). Process}. If No in step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2748-3 whether or not the special game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2748-3, in step 2550 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special gaming notification image display control process described later, and the next process {step 2750 (second). Process}. On the other hand, even if No in step 2748-3, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the special gaming notification image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) of FIG. 63 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the opening mode of the first (second) grand prize opening C10 (C20) in the special game based on the received firing instruction command. Next, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first round is being executed. If Yes in step 2554, the process proceeds to step 2564. On the other hand, if No in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the previous round is a long open round. In the case of Yes in step 2556, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not this round is a long open round. In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the first (second) grand prize opening C10 (C20) in the previous round based on the received round entry number command. Check the number. Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of balls entered into the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) is a predetermined value (two balls in this example) or less. judge. If Yes in step 2562, the process proceeds to step 2566. On the other hand, if No in step 2556, step 2558, or step 2562, the process proceeds to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the second broadcast image on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}. Next, in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG, and in the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}. Transition.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the large winning opening is opened by the long opening pattern in the running round (the game ball is opened to the large winning opening). If more than a predetermined number of game balls (3 balls in this example) do not enter at the end of the round despite the open pattern that allows easy entry), a command from the main control board M side Based on the above, a fifth notification image (for example, an image in which the player is relatively positively notified compared to the second notification image) is displayed, and the player is launched by launching the gaming ball to an appropriate launch position. It will inform you that you can make a profit. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from significantly reducing the number of balls to be played in the special game without recognizing that the player should hit the right side during the special game, and the model is user-friendly. can do.

In addition, the aspect of the fifth notification image and the second notification image is that the player is the fifth notification image (relatively positive display) and the second notification image (relatively negative display). It is not limited to these as long as it is a recognizable aspect. For example, it may be configured to be displayed as a second notification image in an area separately provided outside the effect display device SG. The fifth broadcast image may not be displayed, and only the effect of voice or light may be added. Further, the number of balls entered, which is a condition for executing the notification (warning), is not limited, and the notification may be made only when no balls are entered. In this example, when the large winning opening is opened for two consecutive rounds, it is determined that the ball has entered the large winning opening in the previous round, and the fifth notification image can be executed. , Not limited to this, even if the fifth notification image (notification image in a relatively positive manner) is subsequently displayed when the number of balls entered is less than or equal to a predetermined value in any of the long open rounds. Alternatively, it may be configured to be displayed at the start of the first long open round thereafter. In addition, the timing for erasing the fifth broadcast image may be that the display during the long open round, which is dependent on the requirements, is continued, or in the long open round, a large winning opening exceeding a predetermined value (two in this example). It may be configured to be erased when a ball enters the ball, or it may be configured to be erased with the lapse of a predetermined time. In this example, the display is executed as the processing on the sub control board S side based on the information from the main control board M side (for example, the count number of the round incoming ball count MP70c and the launch instruction command). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode, display timing, etc. may be determined by the processing on the main control board M side, and a command related to instruction display may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. .. In the case where the display mode of the notification image in the next round is configured to be different depending on the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening in the previous round during the big hit execution, for example, to the big winning opening in the previous round. When the fifth notification image is to be displayed in the next round when the number of balls entered is 3 or less, the data related to the number of balls entered in the previous round (on the main control board M side) ( For example, in the case of 3 balls, the logical product of "00000011") and the mask data (for example, "11111100") is taken, and when the calculation result is 0, it is determined that the number of balls is 3 or less. On the sub-control board S side, the counter value related to the number of balls entered into the large winning opening related to the previous round is equal to or less than the predetermined value, and it is related to the start of the next round. When the launch instruction command is received from the main control board M side, the fifth broadcast image may be displayed.

(Example 1 of change from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, in order to prevent the player from not being able to obtain a legitimate ball output during the execution of the special game, a configuration for warning (notifying) that the game should be played by right-handed is described in detail. In the special game being executed, the mode for notifying the player of the launch of the game ball is not limited to this. As another example of such a mode of notification as a change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of the step (fourth) of FIG. 46 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 2784-4 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2748-1 and step 2748-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in the non-time reduction gaming state. After determining that there is and the special game is not being executed, in step 2748-4 (4th change 1), the notification image changing flag (when it is on, the display mode of the 2nd notification image may change). The flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the special gaming notification image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2568 (4th variation 1), steps 2570 (4th variation 1) to 2574 (4th variation 1), and steps 2578 (4th variation 1) to 2584. (4th variation 1), that is, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S opens the first (second) grand prize opening C10 (C20) of the special game based on the received firing instruction command. After confirming the aspect, in step 2568 (4th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the flag during the change of the broadcast image is turned off. If Yes in step 2568 (4th variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2554. On the other hand, if No in step 2568 (4th change 1), the process proceeds to step 2578 (4th change 1). Further, in step 2560, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the number of balls entered into the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) in the previous round based on the received round number of balls entered command, In step 2570 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a predetermined number of balls (11 balls in this example) or more in the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2570 (4th change 1), in step 2572 (4th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the display mode of the second broadcast image being displayed by one step (details are as follows). Set the command to be displayed (described later). Next, in step 2574 (fourth change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the flag during the change of the broadcast image, and proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, in step 2578 (4th variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not this round is a long open round. In the case of Yes in step 2578 (4th change 1), in step 2580 (4th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the first (second) in the previous round based on the received round entry number command. ) Check the number of balls entered into the big winning opening. Next, in step 2582 (4th variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the number of balls to be entered into the 1st (2nd) large winning opening (the large winning opening is closed). It is determined whether or not the number of balls that exceeds the number, in other words, the number of balls that will cause an over-winning, is 11 balls or more in this example. In the case of Yes in step 2582 (4th change 1), in step 2584 (4th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command to change the display mode of the second broadcast image being displayed by one step and display it. Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}. Even if No in step 2578 (4th variation 1) or step 2582 (4th variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, the table in the upper part of the figure is a table showing an example of the transition of the display mode of the second broadcast image. As shown in the figure, the second notification image is displayed as stage 1 in a display mode without characters as shown in the upper right of the display image of the notification image shown on the upper right of the figure during the execution of the special game. .. Further, as step 2 of the above-mentioned "one-step change" mode, one character (one character in this example) is configured to be displayed together with the second broadcast image as shown in the lower part of the display image diagram of the broadcast image. ing. Further, from the stage 3 to the stage 5, the number of characters displayed together with the second notification image will increase one by one. When the display mode of the second broadcast image is four characters (that is, step 5) in step 2584 (fourth variation 1), the mode of the second broadcast image is configured so as not to be changed any more. ing. With the above configuration, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the notification image in this example is limited to the mode of notifying (warning) the player when the proper game is not executed. Instead, the player is required to perform technical intervention (for example, a method of technical intervention also called "over-winning", in which the large winning opening is closed by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball during the execution of the special game. If you succeed in acquiring a relatively large number of balls during the execution of a special game by (entering a game ball that exceeds the predetermined number), etc., you can execute a production that congratulates the player. It can be configured to arouse the satisfaction of the player.

The mode of the second broadcast image is not limited to this example, and the color and gradation of the second broadcast image can be changed, the character can be changed as the stage goes up, and a stepwise effect effect (for example) can be produced. , The color can be changed, and the surroundings of the second broadcast image can be brilliantly produced). In addition, the notification image is when the next round is a long open round on the condition that there was a predetermined value or more (11 balls or more in this example) in the previous round and this time is a long open round. In addition, the configuration is such that the second broadcast image is changed stepwise, but the display mode of the second broadcast image is not limited to this, and when there is a ball winning more than a predetermined value, that is, an "over winning". As a step-by-step change, the number of successful "over-winning" until the final round may be continuously displayed. Further, the timing for changing the display may be the time when "over winning" is detected. If all the "over prizes" are successful in the long open round, a separate effect ("Congratulations!" Or a blessing by voice) may be provided. It should be noted that the case is not limited to the case where the "over winning" is successful, and the second notification image may be changed stepwise when the round ends with a specific number or less of balls. In addition, when an "over prize" occurs, it can be applied as an effect of suggesting in advance whether or not there is a hold that will be a big hit among the holds related to the second main game that is digested after the end of the special game. For example, every time an "over prize" occurs in each long open round, whether or not there is a hold that will be a big hit in the hold for the second main game, the big hit design when the big hit occurs, the big hit effect that is being executed, etc. By using different lottery tables according to the information in the above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of characters (increase by one or more people), and the hold related to the second main game is a big hit. You may want to increase your expectations for something (it will be confirmed that there is a big hit in the hold by reaching the final stage).

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the second to fourth embodiments, based on the command (information) from the main control board M side, it is configured to display a notification, a warning, and a blessing image related to the progress of the game, but the progress of the game is displayed to the player. The mode for notifying about is not limited to this. Further, in addition to the information from the main control board M side, an example of a mode in which the player is notified of the progress of the game, particularly as a process on the sub control board S side in the standby state, will be described below as the fifth embodiment. Only the differences from the two embodiments will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2450 (fifth), that is, in step 2450 (fifth), after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby demo display control process described later, The process proceeds to step 2100.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the standby demo display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) of FIG. 67 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game has been executed for a predetermined period (for example, 180 seconds) or longer. Here, it is determined whether or not the game has been executed by various ball entry detection commands from the main control board M side {auxiliary game start port entry ball detection command, first (second) main game start port entry. Detection of ball detection command, general winning opening ball detection command, etc.} or detection of operation of launch handle D44 (level data transmitted from the main control board M side regarding the handle touch status is continuously in the detection period of a predetermined period. Whether or not the game is executed is determined by (when it is on information). If Yes in step 2452, in step 2454, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby demo in progress flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2454, in step 2456 and step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the standby demo display and a command for displaying the standby demo background. The standby demo display and the standby demo background are configured to be displayed in front of the first broadcast image and the second broadcast image. That is, for example, when the game is not executed for a predetermined period (180 seconds in this example) under the situation where the second notification image is displayed during the time reduction game state, the standby demo display and the standby demo are displayed. By displaying the background, the second broadcast image becomes invisible. Next, in step 2459, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the standby demo timer MP90t {a timer related to the standby demo display (background) and an increment timer}. Next, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby demo in progress flag and proceeds to step 2470. On the other hand, even if No in step 2454, the process proceeds to step 2470. If No in step 2452, in steps 2462 and 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the standby demo display and a command for erasing the display of the standby demo background. .. Next, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets the standby demo timer MP90t (increment timer). Next, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby demonstration flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100).

Next, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby demo timer MP90t has reached the mode change value (30 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2470, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the standby demo background, and proceeds to the process of step 2474. Even if No in step 2470, the process proceeds to step 2474. Next, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby demo timer MP90t has reached the lap value (for example, 60 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2474, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the standby demo background. Next, in step 2478, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the timer value of the standby demo timer MP90t (increment timer), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). Even if No in step 2474, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

With the above configuration, the game can be executed for a predetermined period (180 seconds in this example) by the command (information) from the main control board M side and / or the processing on the sub control board S side related to the execution of the game. If it is not executed, the standby demo display (background) can be displayed. Further, when the game is not executed, the standby demo display is continuously displayed, while the standby demo background is intermittently executed (in this example, every 30 seconds for 30 seconds). The standby demo display and the standby demo background are configured to be displayed in front of the first broadcast image and the second broadcast image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the standby demo display and the standby demo background may be configured to be displayed simultaneously on the same layer. Alternatively, only the second broadcast image may be displayed in front of the standby demo display and the standby demo background. Further, it may be configured so that it can be displayed in a different area by providing a second effect display device or the like.

Next, FIG. 69 is an example of a standby demo image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, from the upper left of the figure, under the situation where the second notification image (character "→ Please hit right →" at the upper end of the effect display device SG) is displayed in the time reduction game state, the decorative design. The fluctuation of is stopped, and the lost symbol is stopped. Next, if the game is not executed for 180 seconds, the standby demo display and the standby demo background are displayed in the upper center of the figure, and the decorative symbol display and the second notification image become invisible. .. Further, when 30 seconds have passed without the game being executed, the standby demo background is erased, and the display of the decorative symbol and the second notification image become visible. The standby demo display is still displayed on the front of the decorative symbol at the same time. Next, when 30 seconds have passed without further executing the game, the standby demo background will be displayed again in the entire area of the effect display device SG, and the display of the decorative pattern and the second notification image will be invisible. Become. Next, when the launch handle D44 is operated by the player, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the detection signal from the launch handle D44, it is determined that the game has been executed, and the standby demo display and the standby demo background are displayed. The display is erased, and the display of the decorative pattern and the second notification image become visible.

With the above configuration, in the fifth embodiment, when the game is not executed for a predetermined period, the player can be informed that the game is on standby, and the mode is changed periodically. It can be configured so that the current game state and the like can be recognized. In addition, by configuring the display priority of the notification image to be lower than the standby demo display and the standby demo background, the standby demo display and the standby demo background displayed by determining that the game is not in progress are being displayed. That is, by configuring so that the notification image is not displayed during the standby demo, it is possible to prevent the situation of the game from being grasped even though the game is not played, and the data capacity is reduced. You can also do it. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the configuration is relatively advantageous to the player in the time-reduced gaming state, the standby demo display and the standby demo background display are executed only during the time-reduced gaming state. It may be obtained, or the mode may be configured to be different between the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state (in the non-time-reduced game state, the standby demo background is partially displayed, etc.). , Negative notification image, etc.). In addition, it is preferable to continue the notification such as the launch instruction display unit HS and the separate notification by the accessory, and the demo display and the demo background are not regularly erased, but the standby demo display and the standby. While continuously displaying the demo background, raise the priority of displaying the decorative pattern and the second notification image (it may be displayed on the entire surface of the standby demo display. Also, the standby demo display and the standby demo background (animation, etc.) can be displayed. As a routine in which the execution is repeated, a period for displaying the game state when the game is stopped (for example, a decorative symbol or the second notification image) may be separately provided, or the game state when the game is stopped (for example, the game state when the game is stopped). For example, a separate timer for displaying a decorative pattern or a second notification image) may be provided to provide a waiting time until the standby demo background and the standby demo display routine are redisplayed. Further, the firing handle D44 may be provided. As a configuration for detecting the operation of the launch handle D44, only the information (Yes or No) of whether or not the launch handle D44 has been operated is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. It is preferable that the information on the division related to the operation (launch intensity, etc.) is not transmitted, and the notification content regarding the division is processed (comprehensively determined) on the sub-control board S side. When the flag related to the striking is changed on the control board M side, the striking information is transmitted based on the handle touch, and if the launch position is immediately notified, the player is informed in advance that it is a big hit. A situation in which the game is detected (for example, in a game machine related to a parallel lottery, the game state is shortened from the game state to non-time by displaying the stop display of the second main game symbol at the timing during the change of the first main game symbol. When the display switches from right-handed to left-handed when the game state is changed to the shortened game state, or when the game machine that changes the game state at the start of the change, the hitting information transmitted by retouching the handle first during the change is used. This is because it is assumed that the game state transition can be inferred based on the notification of the recommended firing position). Further, the notification image displayed when the firing handle D44 is operated is predetermined. It may be configured to be erased by the time display. Further, when the standby demo display and the standby demo background are displayed during the time reduction game state and the notification image is redisplayed by the operation of the firing handle D44, the sound is also output at the same time. It may be configured so that the notification (especially warning) is performed while the standby demo display or the standby demo background is being executed. If the requirements of the notification) are satisfied, the first notification display may be executed. When the notification image is displayed by operating the firing handle D44, the display of the notification image may be erased after a lapse of a predetermined time. For example, in the case where the notification image is deleted 5 seconds after the operation of the firing handle D44, even if the firing handle D44 is operated again 3 seconds after the notification image is displayed, the first firing handle D44 The notification image may be deleted 5 seconds after the operation of. By such a configuration, it will not continue to be displayed more than necessary, and even if the player suddenly releases his hand from the firing handle D44, it will not continue to be displayed more than necessary.

(Sixth Embodiment)
From the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the mode of urging the player to operate the appropriate gaming machine in order to properly proceed the game has been described in detail, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In particular, regarding the right-handed and left-handed instruction display, whether or not the executed instruction image is correct is determined on the sub-control board S side, and if it is not appropriate, the configuration can be corrected and displayed. As the sixth embodiment, only the differences from the first modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the sixth embodiment. The differences from the first modification from the second embodiment are in step 2747-1 (sixth), step 2747-2 (sixth), step 2748-1 (sixth), and step 2350 (sixth). Yes, that is, in step 2747-1 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the state of the game. Next, in step 2747-2 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the time-reduced game state or the special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2747-2 (6th), the process proceeds to step 2747-3. On the other hand, if No in step 2747-2 (6th), the process proceeds to step 2250 (2nd variation 1). Further, in step 2747-8, step 2747-9, or step 2747-13, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the command to be displayed on the fourth broadcast image, in step 2748-1 (sixth), The CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores information regarding whether the various broadcast images indicate left-handed or right-handed in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2350 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the broadcast image confirmation process described later, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the broadcast image confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (sixth) of FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the received firing instruction command, and confirms whether the command is a right-handed command or a left-handed command. Next, in step 2353, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to whether the various broadcast images temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub-control board S instruct left-handed or right-handed. Check the information. Next, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the information related to the confirmed various broadcast images is information related to left-handedness. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the launch instruction command is a left-handed command. In the case of Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display of the first broadcast image, displays the second broadcast image and the fourth broadcast image in the display mode related to right-handed movement. The process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}. On the other hand, if No in step 2354, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the launch instruction command is a right-handed command. In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display of the first broadcast image, displays the second broadcast image and the fourth broadcast image in the display mode related to left-handed movement. The process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}. In step 2362, when the second broadcast image is configured as "non-display = instruct to hit left", the second broadcast image may be configured to be hidden. On the other hand, even if No in step 2356 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

With the above configuration, the information received from the main control board M side (command related to right-handed or left-handed) and the information temporarily stored on the sub-control board S side (instructed to right-handed). Information on whether or not you are hitting, or information on whether you are instructing left-handed strike) does not match {whether it is information (command) related to right-handed strike or information (command) related to left-handed strike} does not match} In this case, based on the command from the main control board M side, the first broadcast image is deleted, and in the second broadcast image and the fourth broadcast image, the display mode related to right-handed stroke → the display mode related to left-handed stroke. It is possible to change the display mode from the left-handed display mode to the right-handed display mode. In this way, it can be appropriately modified so as not to notify the wrong launch position, which is disadvantageous to the player, and the user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained. Further, the first broadcast image is configured to be deleted immediately if the information (command) related to right-handed hitting or the information (command) related to left-handed hitting does not match. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously informing the player of erroneous information regarding the game state of the main game side. In this example, the configuration is such that immediate correction is performed based on the instruction from the main control board M side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that all the broadcast images being displayed are erased (sent next time). Redisplay based on a new command, etc.). It is preferable to provide a dedicated buffer for displaying instructions on the sub-control board S side so that the broadcast image can be referred to at a necessary timing when it is displayed. As described above, when the command from the main control board M side and the content related to the firing instruction do not match with respect to the first broadcast image, the display on the sub control board S side is erased, while the second broadcast image and the second broadcast image are deleted. 4 Regarding the broadcast image, if the command from the main control board M side and the content related to the launch instruction do not match, based on the command received from the main control board M side (based on the game state of the main control board M side). ) It is configured to immediately correct the display on the sub-control board S side and notify it. Based on the notification image that erases the display on the sub-control board S side when the command from the main control board M side and the content related to the launch instruction do not match, and the command received from the main control board M side (main control board). The combination with the notification image for immediately correcting and notifying the display on the sub-control board S side (based on the gaming state on the M side) is not limited to this example, and there is no problem even if it is appropriately changed. When the command from the main control board M side and the content related to the firing instruction do not match between the first notification image and the second notification image, which are the notification images that are relatively conspicuous (the display area is large) when viewed from the player. The fourth notification image, which is a notification image that is relatively inconspicuous to the player (the display area is small), is used as a notification image for erasing the display on the sub control board S side, and a command from the main control board M side. If the contents related to the launch instruction do not match, the display on the sub control board S side is immediately corrected based on the command received from the main control board M side (based on the game state on the main control board M side). It may be configured to be a notification image to be notified. By doing so, unlike the configuration in which the second notification image is switched based on the launch instruction command as shown in FIG. 71, the display timing of the notification image on the effect, which is a conspicuous display, is set on the main control board. It will be possible to shift the timing of the game state transition on the M side.

Further, regarding the transmission of commands from the main control board M side, it can be configured as follows.
(1) A flag related to the striking that changes according to the game state (time shortened game state, probability fluctuation game state, execution of special game, etc.) is set, and a command corresponding to the flag is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. ..
(2) At the timing when the flag related to the division may change, it is transmitted each time even if there is no actual change.
(3) The above timings are "when the power is restored", "when the lost symbol is stopped", "when the special game starts", "when the big winning opening starts", "when the big winning opening is closed", and "special game". At the end of ". (4) The flag related to the distinction is also output to an external terminal (for example, a test terminal).

(7th Embodiment)
In the change example 1 from the second embodiment, regarding the position where the player launches the game ball, the improper entry is made within a predetermined period after confirming the entry of the game ball at the inappropriate launch position. The notification image is displayed and the notification by voice can be executed each time when the notifications are continuously confirmed, but the configuration of these notifications (warnings) is not limited to this. Regarding the configuration in which notification (continuation) can be continued until the mode to be notified (warning) is resolved or for a predetermined period, as the seventh embodiment, the following differences from the first modification from the second embodiment. Only detailed.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a right-handed image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second variation 1) of FIG. 51 in the seventh embodiment. The differences from the first modification from the second embodiment are step 2167 (7th), step 2168 (7th), and steps 2173 (7th) to 2182 (7th), that is, step 2167. In (7), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is turned on when a right-handed warning is being executed flag (when a predetermined number of balls are detected in the first main game start port A10 in a situation where right-handedness should be made). (Flag) is off. If Yes in step 2167 (7th), the process proceeds to step 2152, and if No in step 2167 (7th), the process proceeds to step 2176 (7th). Further, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2164 that the counter value of the first start port entry rate counter MP61c is equal to or higher than the notification value (two), in step 2168 (7th), The CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sound effects, and outputs the voice “Right-handed!” From the speaker right D24R. Next, in step 2173 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the right-handed warning executing flag. In step 2174 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets the first start port confirmation timer MP21t, and proceeds to step 2171. Further, in the case of No in step 2167 (7th), in other words, when the right-handed warning executing flag is on, in step 2176 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a right-handed warning end condition. Is determined whether or not is satisfied.

Here, the right-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth notification image and audio output timing, (2) from the main control board M side to the right side of the game board. Receives pass information (general winning opening ball entry detection command, large winning opening entry ball detection command, second starting opening entry ball detection command, auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection command, etc.) provided in the arranged structure. The main control board when the game state is changed, when the game ball is detected by the effect control sensor on the right side of the board, or (3) a big hit occurs, or a game state changes such as a time-shortened game state / probability fluctuation game state. When a launch instruction command related to right-handed strike is received from the M side, it is satisfied by either of. If Yes in step 2176 (7th), in step 2178 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to erase the display of the 5th broadcast image (right-handed). Next, in step 2180 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the output of the voice "Right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R. Next, in step 2182 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-handed warning executing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7). The following conditions may be used as the right-handed warning end condition.
(A) It may be the time when the symbol change ends at the time when the notification by the fifth notification image (right-handed) is started, or the time when the next change starts.
(B) After starting the notification by the fifth notification image (right-handed), a specific effect (super reach with high expectation of big hit, high expectation advance notice effect before reach, pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed during the symbol change. When the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol occurs in the symbol change) (C) When the power is turned off and back (D) After a specific number of symbol changes (for example, the notification is started or the N change (N is an integer)) At the start or stop of. N is the total number of fluctuations of the first main game or the second main game.) At the above timing, the right-handed warning image display (fifth notification image) is terminated. Although it was a condition, if the right-handed image warning is displayed and the warning is displayed at the same time by voice or the lamp member of the game machine frame, the firing position is not synchronized with the end of the image and is still recommended by voice etc. May be alerted. Further, regarding the interval between the plurality of fluctuations immediately after the transition of the game state, for example, in either case of the first main game hold or the second main game hold that is preferentially digested, the configuration may be such to notify.

Next, the lower part of the figure is an example of a display image diagram of the notification image for the fifth notification image (right-handed) and the fifth notification image (left-handed). In the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow (with a diagonal striped texture pasted) with the characters "right-handed" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is an aspect. In addition, in the fifth notification image (left-handed), a left-pointing arrow (with a diagonal striped texture pasted) with the characters "left-handed" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is an aspect to be done. The display mode is not limited to these, and any mode may be used as long as it can clearly notify the player of the right-handed or left-handed instruction.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the left-handed image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second variation 1) of FIG. 51 in the seventh embodiment. The differences from the first modification from the second embodiment are step 2267 (7th), step 2268 (7th), and steps 2273 (7th) to 2482 (7th), that is, step. At 2267 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left-handed warning executing flag is off. If Yes in step 2267 (7th), the process proceeds to step 2252, and if No in step 2267 (7th), the process proceeds to step 2276 (7th). If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2264 that the counter value of the general winning opening ball entry rate counter MP62c is equal to or higher than the notification value (two), the sub-control board S is subordinated in step 2268 (7th). The CPUSC of the control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth notification image (left-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sound effects, and outputs the voice "Left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L. Next, in step 2273 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the left-handed warning executing flag. In step 2274 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t, and proceeds to step 2271. Further, in the case of No in step 2267 (7th), in other words, when the left-handed warning executing flag is on, in step 2276 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the left-handed warning end condition. Is determined whether or not is satisfied.

Here, the left-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth broadcast image (left-handed) and the audio output timing, and (2) from the main control board M side. Detection information in the structure arranged on the left side of the game board (first main game start opening ball entry detection command, left side general winning opening entry ball detection command (when the configuration is such that the general winning opening is provided on the left side of the game board), left side Auxiliary game start port When a ball entry detection command (when the auxiliary game start port is provided on the left side of the game board) is received, or (3) The big hit game / small hit game ends (time is shortened after the end). When a launch instruction command related to left-handed strike is received from the main control board M side, such as (excluding those that shift to a state) or the end of a time-reduced game state / probability fluctuation game state, it will be satisfied by either. .. In the case of Yes in step 2276 (7th), in step 2278 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to erase the display of the 5th broadcast image (left-handed). Next, in step 2280 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the output of the voice "Left-handed!" From the speaker right D24R. Next, in step 2482 (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the left-handed warning executing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-13). Even if No in step 2276 (7th), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-13).

With the above configuration, in the seventh embodiment, when the player continuously detects the launch of the game ball to an inappropriate launch position in the progress of the game, the game is played at the normal launch position. It was configured to continue to display the correct firing position until the ball was fired or for a predetermined period of time.

It should be noted that the fifth notification image is displayed in an inconspicuous manner (smallly displayed in the corner of the effect display device SG) after a relatively short time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the notification (display) was started. ), It is desirable that the mode is gradually changed so that it is erased after a relatively long period of time (for example, 15 to 30 seconds). The same applies to voice, and a configuration can be configured in which voice notification is performed only for the first short period (2 to 3 seconds). In this configuration, if the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is shortened (for example, 3 seconds), or if the fifth broadcast image is displayed in duplicate when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped. Since the design becomes invisible, the fifth broadcast image may be forcibly erased after the first short period (2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed. Further, as a process in the case of such a shortened fluctuation, the fifth broadcast image may be configured to be continuously displayed over the next fluctuation (for example, in the fluctuation with the holding number 4), the fifth broadcast image may be displayed. If it is displayed, the display will be executed in advance with two fluctuations, the right-handed warning execution flag will be left on, and the timer for timing the end condition will be temporarily hidden from the 5th notification image. Do not renew during the period, etc.).

In the seventh embodiment, as a condition for executing the display of the notification (warning), the display of the notification (warning) can be executed when the firing of the game ball to an inappropriate firing position is continuously detected. However, the condition for executing the display of the notification (warning) is not limited to this. Executes a warning (notification) for launching a game ball to an inappropriate launch position at the time of transition from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed, such as when the game state is changed or when a special game is executed. As an example of change 1 from the 7th embodiment, only the changes from the 7th embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are steps 1648-1 (7th change 1) and 1648-2 (7th change 1), that is, in step 1626, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in a special game. After setting the game state information command (command to the sub-control board S side), in step 1648-1 (7th variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the first (second) big winning opening. It is determined whether or not the ball entering C10 (C20) is detected. In the case of Yes in step 1648-1 (7th change 1), in step 1648-2 (7th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a large winning opening ball entry detection command {1st (2nd) large. This is a command related to entering a ball into the winning opening C10 (C20), and a command to the sub-control board S side} is set, and the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, even if No in step 1648-1 (7th variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1628 (2nd). With the above configuration, it is possible to transmit information (command) to the effect that the ball has entered the large winning opening during the special game execution to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the 7th embodiment are Step 2747-3 (7th change 1), Step 2850 (7th change 1), Step 2748-5 (7th change 1), and Step 2900 (7th change 1). That is, in step 2747-2, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the launch instruction command is related to right-handed striking, in step 2747-3 (7th variation 1), the sub-control board S The CPUSC of the above sets a command to display the second notification image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2850 (7th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the right-handed warning display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2747-7. Further, in step 2747-2, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the launch instruction command is related to left-handedness, in step 2785-5 (7th variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is changed. , Set a command to display the second notification image (left-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2900 (7th change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the left-handed warning display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2747-13.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the right-handed warning display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (7th variation 1) of FIG. 75 in the modification 1 from the 7th embodiment. First, in step 2852, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right-handed warning executing flag is off. If Yes in step 2852, it is determined in step 2854 whether or not the right-handed monitoring flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the broadcast image division timing has been reached. Here, the notification image delimiter timing is (1) the second notification image (left-handed) is displayed during the non-time reduction game state, and (2) the second notification image (2) during the time reduction game state. (Right-handed) is displayed, (3) The second notification image (right-handed) is displayed during the execution of the special game, and it is the timing of mutual transition between the situations. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the notification image delimiter timing transitioning to right-handed, and an increment timer). do. Next, in step 2860, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the right-handed monitoring flag (a flag that is turned on during the period of monitoring whether or not right-handedness is being executed), and in step 2862. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 2854, the process proceeds to step 2862. If No in step 2856, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-7).

Next, in step 2862, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the general winning opening ball entry detection command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2864, in step 2866, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, in step 2868, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-handed monitoring flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2747-7). If No in step 2864, in step 2870, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t has reached a predetermined value (30 seconds in this example). .. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth broadcast image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2874, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sound effects, and outputs the voice “Right-handed!” From the speaker right D24R. Next, in step 2875 and step 2876, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-handed monitoring monitoring flag and turns on the right-handed warning executing flag. Next, in step 2878, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2747-7). Even if No in step 2870, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-7).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2862, that is, when the special game is being executed, in step 2882, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the big winning opening ball detection command from the main control board M side {1st (1st (1) 2) It is determined whether or not a command related to information indicating that a ball has been detected in the large winning opening C10 (C20) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2882, in step 2884, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (increment timer) and clears to zero. Next, in step 2886, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-handed monitoring flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2747-7). On the other hand, if No in step 2882, in step 2880, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the start timing of the second round in the special game has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2880, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7). On the other hand, if No in step 2880, that is, if the start timing of the second round has been reached and the large winning opening ball detection command from the main control board M side has not been received, steps 2872 to step 2 By executing the process of 2878, the display of the fifth notification image (right-handed) in the effect display device SG and the output to the speaker right D24R related to the right-handed instruction are executed, and the next process (step 2747-) is executed. 7).

On the other hand, if No in step 2852, that is, if the right-handed warning executing flag is on, it is determined in step 2888 whether or not the right-handed warning end condition is satisfied. Here, the right-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth notification image and audio output timing, (2) general winning opening from the main control board M side. It will be satisfied either when the ball detection command is received or when (3) the launch instruction command related to right-handed strike is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2888, in step 2890, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to erase the display of the fifth broadcast image (right-handed), and at the same time, "right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R. Stop audio output. Next, in step 2894, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-handed warning executing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7). Even if No in step 2888, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-7). Since the display image diagram of the fifth broadcast image in the lower part of the figure is the same as the modification 1 from the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the left-handed warning display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (7th variation 1) of FIG. 75 in the modification 1 from the 7th embodiment. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left-handed warning executing flag is off. If Yes in step 2902, it is determined in step 2904 whether or not the left-handed monitoring flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the broadcast image division timing has been reached. Here, the notification image delimiter timing is (1) the second notification image (left-handed) is displayed during the non-time reduction game state, and (2) the second notification image (2) during the time reduction game state. (Right-handed) is displayed, (3) The second notification image (right-handed) is displayed during the execution of the special game, and it is the timing of mutual transition between the situations. In the case of Yes in step 2906, in step 2908, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t (a timer that measures the elapsed time from the notification image delimiter timing that transitions to left-handed, and is an increment timer). do. Next, in step 2910, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the left-handed monitoring flag (a flag that is turned on during the period of monitoring whether or not left-handedness is being executed), and in step 2912. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 2904, the process proceeds to step 2912. If No in step 2906, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-13).

Next, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first main game start opening ball entry detection command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2912, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, in step 2916, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the left-handed monitoring flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-13). If No in step 2912, in step 2918, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t has reached a predetermined value (300 seconds in this example). .. In the case of Yes in step 2918, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth broadcast image (left-handed) in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2922, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sound effects, and outputs the voice "Left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L. Next, in step 2924 and step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the left-handed monitoring flag and turns on the left-handed warning executing flag. Next, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2747-13). Even if No in step 2918, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-13).

On the other hand, if No in step 2902, that is, if the left-handed warning executing flag is on, it is determined in step 2929 whether or not the left-handed warning end condition is satisfied. Here, the left-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth broadcast image and audio output timing, (2) the first start port from the main control board M side. It will be satisfied either when the ball entry detection command is received or when (3) the launch instruction command related to the left-handed strike is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2929, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the fifth broadcast image (left-handed). Next, in step 2932, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the output of the voice “Left-handed!” From the speaker left D24L. Next, in step 2934, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the left-handed warning executing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-13). Even if No in step 2929, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2747-13). Since the display image diagram of the fifth broadcast image in the lower part of the figure is the same as the modification 1 from the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.

With the above configuration, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the state in which the player should hit right → the state in which he should hit left, or the state in which he should hit left, with respect to the position where the player launches the game ball. When it is detected that the player is not firing the game ball at the correct firing position corresponding to the state after the transition within a predetermined period from the time when the state to be right-handed is changed to the state to be hit, the effect is produced. Aggressive launch instruction display and voice warning on the display device SG can be continuously executed until it can be confirmed that the game ball is launched at the correct launch position or a predetermined period of time has elapsed. .. It should be noted that the display mode on the effect display device and the warning mode by voice are not limited to these as long as they actively notify the player, and for example, the warning may be given by blinking the game effect lamp D26. The warning may be notified by stimulating the five senses of the player by the operation of the effect member provided in the gaming machine frame, such as vibrating the firing handle D44 or the sub input button.

If the predetermined value related to the right-handed end condition is long enough to extend to the next round during the execution of the special game, the display instruction of the notification image based on the launch instruction command for starting the next round is ignored. However, it is also possible to give priority to the display of the notification image related to the warning (notification). With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player that appropriate firing has not been achieved in the recommended gaming state. On the other hand, the predetermined value related to the right-handed end condition is set to a shorter period than the period for executing one round, or the launch instruction command is transmitted to the sub-control board S side together with the grand prize opening closing command. At the same time as closing the mouth, the display of the notification image related to the warning (notification) may be terminated when the launch instruction command is received. With this configuration, if the round to be executed next to the round in which the warning display is executed is a short open, the launch instruction display may not be displayed. Further, at the time of a big hit, there is a case where a series of effect display is performed mainly in the early round game such as the big hit start demo and the first round in the big hit. At this time, from the sub-main board that controls the effect at the start of the big hit demo or at the start of each round, the display of the launch position information and the information related to the effect during the demo or the effect during the round are transmitted to the sub-sub board that controls the image. The sub-sub board that controls the image has a configuration that ignores (does not reset the effect) the information about the effect during the demo and the effect during the round if it is the same as the information received last time, and about the information about the display of the launch position information. If there is no change, it will be ignored as well. Even if the information related to the effect is common as the information received from the sub-main board, if the information related to the display of the launch position information is different, the display mode of the launch position information is changed.

(8th Embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment, in the standby demo display, the standby demo background (which may be an animation and is displayed with priority over the entire effect display device SG) and the standby demo display (right-handed instruction, variable pattern, etc.) are displayed. (Display that can be displayed at the same time) is displayed repeatedly and alternately, but the mode for displaying information on the progress of the game (right-handed, stay stage, etc.) to the player in the standby demo display is limited to this. Not done. As an example of another aspect of the standby demo display as the eighth embodiment, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the standby demo display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) of FIG. 67 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is step 2457 (8th) and step 2464 (8th), that is, in step 2456, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the standby demo display. After that, in step 2457 (eighth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the notification effect during the standby demonstration, and proceeds to step 2458. Here, the standby demo during notification effect is an effect that is displayed at the same time as the standby demo display and the standby demo background, and is displayed in a mode different from various notification images (for example, the character has an arrow pointing to the right). It is a production to be done. The first broadcast image and the second broadcast image are configured to be displayed in front (layer) of the standby demo display and the standby demo background in the display control. Further, in step 2462, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to erase the display of the standby demo display, in step 2464 (eighth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is instructed during the standby demo. A command for erasing the display is set, and the process proceeds to step 2464.

Next, FIG. 79 is an example of a standby demo image diagram in the eighth embodiment. First, on the left side of the figure, under the situation where the second notification image is displayed in the time-reduced gaming state, the variation of the decorative symbol is completed and the lost symbol is stopped. Next, when 180 seconds have passed without the player executing the game (operation of the launch handle D44, etc.), the standby demo display (in this example, "waiting" is displayed) and the standby demo background (this example). The night background) is displayed, and the display of the decorative pattern is invisible, but the second notification image is visible. In addition, a notification effect is displayed during the standby demonstration, suggesting that the situation should be right-handed. Next, it is determined that the game has been executed because the game ball has entered the second main game start port B10 (due to the detection of the game ball entering the second main game start port B10). The standby demo display, the standby demo background, and the standby demo during notification effect are erased, and the display of the decorative pattern and the second notification image can be visually recognized. It should be noted that even during the standby demo (the period during which the standby demo display, the standby demo background, and the standby demo notification effect can be displayed), it is determined whether or not to display the warning display (for example, the fifth notification image). When the conditions for executing and displaying the warning display are satisfied, the fifth notification image may be configured to be displayed, and when such a configuration is performed, the fifth notification image is a standby demo image (a standby demo image (. It may be configured to be displayed with priority over the standby demo display, the image displayed during the standby demo such as the standby demo background, etc. (the fifth notification image has a higher display priority than the standby demo image). .. In the eighth embodiment, the display of the standby demo image is terminated when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, but the display is not limited to this, and the effect display device SG is used. Since it is sufficient to end the display of the standby demo image at the timing when it is inconvenient if the player does not make the effect display visible by erasing the standby demo image in, the first main game start port A10 is reached. It may be configured to end the display of the standby demo image triggered by the entry of a game ball, etc., and when the trigger that becomes the end condition of the display of the standby demo image satisfies the display start condition of the fifth notification image. May be configured to start displaying the fifth broadcast image at the same time as deleting the standby demo image.

With the above configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the current state of the gaming machine (particularly, the state related to right-handed or left-handed) even while the standby demo effect is being executed. Become. When right-handed and left-handed are simultaneously notified by voice, the voice output may also be configured for standby demo display (power saving mode, for example, the volume becomes low). In addition, in a situation where a left-handed strike should be instructed, unlike a situation in which a right-handed strike should be instructed, generally, the gaming state when starting a game at a game store is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening game. Since it is set to the state, the first notification image, the second notification image, or the notification effect during the standby demo may not be displayed during the standby demo display, and the attraction effect in the standby demo effect may be enhanced. .. It should be noted that these display controls may be performed by providing a plurality of layers according to the display priority, or may be controlled by ending and / or starting the display or the effect. Further, when at least the first notification image and the second notification image can be displayed as the notification image, that is, when a plurality of types of notification images can be displayed, at least one notification image is on standby during the standby demo display. It may be configured to be higher than the display priority of the demo screen. Further, in the situation where the notification image related to right-handed hitting is displayed, the standby demo may be configured not to be displayed, and in such a configuration, one of the multiple types of notification images related to right-handed hitting is provided. The standby demo may be configured not to be displayed in the displayed situation, or the standby demo may not be displayed in the situation where a certain notification image is displayed among the multiple types of right-handed notification images, while the above-mentioned notification is displayed. It may be configured so that the standby demo can be displayed in the situation where the notification image other than the image is displayed.

(9th Embodiment)
As described above, as the processing on the sub-control board S side, the command from the main control board M side (particularly, whether it is a command related to right-handed or left-handed) and a command on the sub-control board S side. After comparing the information related to the retained notification image (whether it is a notification image related to the right-handed instruction display or a notification image related to the left-handed instruction display), a command is given to the effect display device SG by the processing on the sub-sub side. Is configured to transmit, so that there is no discrepancy between the information regarding the game state on the main control board M side and the commands on the sub-sub side, but the information is not limited to this and the information on the main control board M side. Regarding another aspect of the configuration for preventing a discrepancy between (game state, etc.) and the command to the effect display device SG on the sub-sub side, as the ninth embodiment, the difference from the fifth embodiment. Only will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 80 is a drawing showing a basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is that, from the viewpoint of the player, a part of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG overlaps with the upper end portion of the display area SG10, and the movable body accessory YK is on the player side of the center decoration D38. Is the point that is provided.

Next, FIG. 81 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the ninth embodiment. First, the difference from the sixth embodiment is step 2700 (9th) and step 2950 (9th), that is, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process. After that, in step 2700 (9th), the launch position notification control process described later is executed. Further, in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stay stage determination process, and then in step 2950 (9th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S drives a movable body accessory, which will be described later. The control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2020.

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the launch position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (9th) of FIG. 81 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2749-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the content of the symbol variation display start instruction command (command related to the current gaming state) received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2749-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the game state in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2749-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the content of the launch instruction command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2749-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has information on the state of the game and information on the launch instruction as commands to the sub-sub side based on the contents of the symbol variation display start instruction command and the launch instruction command. Generates a broadcast image display command, which is one command including and. Next, in step 2749-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the generated broadcast image display command, and proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the movable body accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 2950 (9th) of FIG. 81 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2952, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the drive start timing of the movable body accessory has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts driving the movable body accessory. Next, in step 2965, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the drive end timing of the movable body accessory has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2965, in step 2958, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S ends the driving of the movable body accessory, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). On the other hand, even if No in step 2952 or step 2965, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2020). The end of driving the movable body accessory represented by FIG. 83 is the timing at which the operation of the movable body accessory set as the effect is ended, and the movable body accessory YK in the ninth embodiment is the effect display device. This is the timing at which the operation of advancing to a position overlapping a part of the front surface of the SG (the position where the overlapping area is large) is performed, a predetermined effect operation is performed, and the operation until returning to the initial position is completed. Depending on the type of movable body accessory provided on the game board, an operation such as moving to another standby position (a position where the area overlapping with the effect display device SG is smaller than during the effect execution) without returning to the initial position is performed. If so, it is possible to set the timing for completing the operation of moving to the initial position or another standby position as the timing for ending the drive. In addition, after detecting that the movable body accessory YK has moved to the initial position or another standby position by a sensor or the like, it may be set to execute an operation of moving or holding the movable body accessory YK to a more optimum position. In these cases, the position of the movable body accessory YK can be confirmed when it is detected by the sensor, so that the sensor detects it even if all the processes related to the operation of the movable body accessory YK are not completed. The timing may be controlled so as to determine the timing at which the operation of the movable body accessory YK for executing another control is completed.

Next, FIG. 84 is an example of the broadcast image display command according to the ninth embodiment. Here, the command transmitted from the sub-main board to the sub-sub board side is composed of a first command (8 bits) indicating the type of the command and a second command (8 bits) indicating the processing content defined for each type. Will be done. Although the first command of the notification image display command is not illustrated in the figure, 8-bit fixed data indicating that the information is instruction information related to the notification image display is transmitted. On the other hand, the second command of the notification image display command is composed of 8-bit information consisting of 8 alphanumers, as shown in the upper part of the figure, of which 2 bits corresponding to the alphanumerical "A". Corresponds to the information regarding the state of the game, and the 3 bits corresponding to the alphanumerical "B" correspond to the information regarding the launch instruction. Next, as shown in the middle part of the figure, the following four pieces of information can be given as an example of the information regarding the state of the game related to the alphanumerical "A".
[Information on the state of the game (A)]
1. 1. Non-probability non-time reduction: Information indicating that the game is in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state. Non-probability change time reduction: Information that the game is in a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state. Probability change: Information that the game is in a probability fluctuation game state, 4. During the demonstration: Information indicating that the standby demonstration is in progress As shown in the lower part of the figure, the following eight pieces of information are given as an example of the information regarding the launch instruction related to the alphanumerical character "B".
[Information on launch instructions (B)]
1. 1. Hidden (Clear Display): Used to erase the displayed notification image. First notification image (left-handed): An image with a large display area related to left-handed. First notification image (right-handed): An image with a large display area related to right-handed. Second notification image (left-handed): An image in which the display area related to left-handed is small, 5. Second notification image (right-handed): An image in which the display area related to right-handed is small, 6. Second notification image, accessory avoidance notification image (right-handed): Image displayed while driving a movable accessory, 7. Demo notification image (left-handed): Image related to left-handed displayed during the standby demo, 8. Demo notification image (right-handed): Image related to right-handed displayed during the standby demo

By transmitting the information (A) regarding the state of the game and the information (B) regarding the launch instruction as the same command in this way, the time lag due to the instruction of image display by different commands and the time lag during the time lag. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect image related to the game state and the image related to the launch instruction become inconsistent due to the change in the game state. Further, in the number 6 of the information (B) regarding the launch instruction, two images, a second notification image (right-handed) and an accessory avoidance notification image (right-handed), are displayed, and the second notification image is the accessory. Even if it is partially difficult to see due to driving, the accessory avoidance notification image (right-handed) is displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG that does not overlap with the area in which the accessory is driven. It is possible to visually indicate that the character should be hit to the right even while the character is being driven. It should be noted that the second notification image was left displayed while the accessory was being driven, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second notification image is deleted and the accessory avoidance notification image is displayed while the accessory is being driven. However, when two notification images are displayed when the accessory is driven, three notification images may be displayed by further displaying the accessory avoidance notification image.

The mode of these broadcast image display commands is not limited to this example. For example, the number of bits related to the broadcast image display command is increased (for example, 8-bit data is transmitted three times, and the upper 4-bit data and the lower 4-bit data of 1 8-bit data are concatenated with other 2 8-bit data. Then, a 12-bit first command and a second command are generated, or 16-bit to 32-bit information is transmitted at a time, and the first command and the second command are collectively transmitted, etc.). As a result, it is possible to diversify and display the mode of the notification image displayed on the effect display device SG, and the display position of the notification image can be changed depending on the game state and the effect display content (so that it is easy to see). You can also do it. As an example of such additional information, it can be configured to determine the display position of the broadcast image by processing on the sub-control board S side. For example, display position indicating information such as (1) normal position, (2) upper left, (3) upper right, (4) center, etc. can be added using a 2-bit area, and further details may be added depending on the number of bits. Position setting is possible. Not only the position information but also the addition of information about the enlargement ratio (30%, 50%, 100%, 200%, etc.) and another notification image (for example, right-handed, left-handed, non-right-handed, left-handed, always displayed 4th notification image). By adding information related to the specification of the display content for the display), it is possible to change the display size and switch the display of a plurality of broadcast images at the same time (or intentionally shift the timing). Regarding the control to shift the display timing for multiple images, the case where it is necessary to realize the notification content that matches the appearance of the production and the notification content that matches the game state on the main control board M side is taken into consideration. Is. Further, a special display in the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo may be provided, and the display mode may be changed to the special display when the number of consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number. In addition, it is also possible to add information with or without voice notification.

Next, FIG. 85 is an example of the accessory avoidance notification image image diagram according to the ninth embodiment. First, from the upper left of the figure, the variation of the decorative symbol has started in the time-reduced gaming state, and the second notification image (right-handed) is displayed. Next, the movable body accessory YK descends to a position overlapping the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, making it difficult to visually recognize the second broadcast image, and at the same time, serves as a lower left area of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. The object avoidance notification image is displayed at a position that does not overlap (visible) with the movable object. Next, when the reach is started, the movable body accessory YK rises to a position that does not overlap with the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and the second notification image becomes visible, the lower left accessory avoidance notification image is displayed. Will be erased. Next, as the stop symbol of the symbol change, the "7" symbol is stopped, and then the special game is started. The mode of the broadcast image is not limited to this example, and for example, the accessory avoidance broadcast image may have the same mode as the second broadcast image. As for the timing of displaying or erasing the accessory avoidance notification image, the number of effect frames is counted, and the sensor detects that the movable accessory has returned to the initial position or has reached the movable position. It may be a configuration to be executed based on. Further, in the situation where the accessory avoidance notification image is displayed, it is possible that the movable accessory is stopped due to an error during operation. Therefore, the accessory avoidance notification image is the movement trajectory (moving range) of the movable accessory. It is preferable to provide a display position (display position in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG) at a position that does not overlap with).

With the above configuration, in the ninth embodiment, a new command is given based on the information on the main control board M side (state related to the game) and the launch instruction command held on the sub control board S side. By generating (notification image display command) and transmitting it to the effect display device SG by processing on the sub-sub side, it is possible to execute display with diversified display positions and display modes more reliably. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the progress of the game, and the structure can be configured to enhance the interest. In addition, the situation where an error has occurred in the movable accessory and the target movable accessory does not operate (error of the target accessory itself, error of the accessory that interferes with the target accessory at the operating position, etc.) When it is recognized as management information on the sub-main board side, it is controlled on the sub-sub board side to control the accessory avoidance notification image and to execute the effect in such a manner that the image effect is not displayed due to the movement of the accessory. You may send a command, or if an error occurs in this operation and normal operation cannot be executed (return operation, retry operation does not return to the initial position, etc.). May be controlled to output the accessory avoidance notification image as it is or to output it again in order to reliably and visually notify the position (direction) at which the game ball should be launched.

Next, FIG. 86 is an image diagram showing an example of the aspect of the broadcast image according to this example. The figure shows an example of a right-handed instruction, but of course it can also be applied to left-handed. From the upper left of the figure, a mere right-pointing arrow image, an image by gradation (may be a mode in which the gradation moves by animation), dot display, and from the middle left of the figure, a texture consisting of multiple colors is pasted on the arrow image. Image (may be a mode in which the texture moves to the right by animation), an image with characters (characters instructing right-handedness) inside an arrow with a two-color checkered pattern, from the lower left of the figure. An image in which a right-pointing arrow is attached to a character instructing right-handedness and an image in which the character has a right-pointing display are shown. The display mode of these instruction displays is not limited to this example, and any image (including animation) indicating that a right-handed strike is instructed can be applied to this example. Further, as a display mode of these images, the display position is changed according to the instruction content of the left-handed or right-handed (for example, when the left-handed is instructed, the upper left of the effect display device SG), the player. Can intuitively understand the content of the instruction notification (whether it should be right-handed or left-handed). In addition, when the firing mode is incorrect (or when the game is not executed), the notification mode is a positive notification mode (the image is displayed larger, the color is changed to a conspicuous one, or the lamp brightness is increased). Or, it may be configured to be changed to a mode in which the volume is increased). Furthermore, it is configured to emphasize the notification mode more when the warning notification (notification when the game ball is launched at the wrong firing position) is executed but the notification is not followed. It may be good (accelerating the speed of animation, increasing the lamp brightness, expanding the display area, further increasing the volume, etc.). Further, it is also possible to make the player surely perceive it by other vibrations (for example, by vibrating the frame accessory or by vibrating the firing handle D44). Further, the display mode (color, character, etc.) may be different depending on the game state (probability variation game state, etc.). Regarding the determination of whether or not to emphasize the notification effect when the warning notification is being performed, the condition for determining that the warning notification is to be executed may be used in the same manner (for example, the notification execution judgment). After resetting the counter, a judgment criterion may be set separately (based on the judgment as to whether or not the condition for the judgment value is satisfied again) (for example, cumulative addition from the notification execution condition has reached the emphasis stage. When emphasis control).

An example of a notification image with a pattern consisting of two colors shown on the right in the middle of the figure is shown. However, when the notification image is represented by two or more colors in this way, the player has color vision deficiency. However, it is preferable to use a color combination of colors that can be easily distinguished. By using such a notification image (for example, display by an arrow or a character string), a larger number of players can clearly recognize the instruction by the notification image. In particular, it is preferable to use this aspect in warning notification (notification by a first notification image or a second notification image, which is a notification when a game ball is launched at an erroneous launch position). Here, the easily distinguishable color combination is, for example, in the case of two colors, a warm color (preferably a color having a hue of 1 to 8, more preferably a hue of 3 to 5) and a cold color (preferably a color having a hue of 3 to 5). It is a combination with a hue of 13 to 19, more preferably a hue of 8 to 15). When the colors constituting the broadcast image are a combination of colors that are easily distinguishable by a player having at least two or more color vision deficiencies, the content of the broadcast by the broadcast image can be clearly recognized. In addition, it is preferable that at least two or more colors are attached in such a manner that the information to be notified can be identified (for example, a cold color is attached in the figure to which the warm color is attached. The arrow is drawn). Although it is expressed as two colors for convenience, as described above, an expression using multiple colors (gradation expression, etc.) may be used as a combination within an appropriate hue range, and it is expressed by two or more system colors. Anything should be considered so as to improve the distinctiveness.

Further, as another aspect of improving the distinctiveness of the broadcast image so that it can be recognized, the following aspects can be mentioned. First, the color combinations that are likely to be difficult to distinguish are (Ai, Bi), and the following color combinations can be mentioned.
-First combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A1, B1) = (green, red)
-Second combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A2, B2) = (blue, light orange)
-Third combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A3, B3) = (red, light orange)

When these indistinguishable color combinations are included in the broadcast image, the color of Ai can be converted to Ci (for example, yellow) which is a color other than Bi, and the display can be easily identified. .. Specifically, when the player finds it difficult to see the notification image, the operation means for directing (the cross switch, the directing lever, the directing button, etc. provided in the gaming machine) are sub-input buttons at the timing such as during the demo screen. ) Can be displayed by a function such as a setting screen (a sample image can be displayed on the setting screen and Ci that can be easily seen by the conversion can be selected, etc.), enabling the change to a color that is easy to see. It may be configured. The setting may be applied only to the notification image (particularly the warning notification image), or may be applied to those that change the motif such as the background display or the decorative frame arranged at the corner of the display screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the distinctiveness of the broadcast image as a part of customizing the motif of the effect, instead of changing the color. In addition, based on this customization, it may be possible to change the effect mode indicating the game result executed during the symbol change according to the setting.

It should be noted that such a broadcast image may be configured to be compatible with multiple languages. For example, on the menu screen, it is possible to set a notification image in multiple languages (during the standby demo, it is displayed in a plurality of compatible languages that the display can be set in another language). If other languages are set, the telop for directing in Japanese during reach or big hit, and the display related to the recommended launch position will be replaced with the corresponding language, or it will be written in Japanese together. can do. At the same time, the system voice (for example, the voice "Right-handed!", Which is output at the same time as the notification image related to right-handed hitting) may be replaced with the corresponding language. In addition, for the image that notifies the distinction (for example, "right-handed!"), Even if the language is not set (as an initial setting), the English notification image (for example, "Please launch on the light side") It may be configured to display "." At the same time. In addition, the voice for notifying the distinction (for example, "hit right!") Is displayed at the same time under the situation where another language is set. When the notification image to be displayed is highlighted (for example, a relatively large notification image is displayed when the instruction from the notification image is not followed), the voice notification in the set language may be output.

In addition, when a game progress that does not follow the notification image is detected, such as detecting a left-handed hit while displaying a notification image instructing right-handed hitting, the notification is emphasized (notification is performed in the notification mode at the time of irregularity). When configured, for example, during the period when the symbol is not reachable in the symbol fluctuation and the period when the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped (the period before the temporary stop), the emphasized notification is executed and in the period. While it is configured not to execute the lottery of the effect to be executed, the period after the reach during the symbol change and the period after the temporary stop (as if the symbol change is executed multiple times with one symbol change). During the period during which an effect that is important for whether or not the symbol change becomes a big hit, such as the period after the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous change, which is the change of the decorative symbol that executes the temporary stop to be shown multiple times, can be executed. It may be configured so that the lottery of the production can be executed. In this case, even if the condition for executing the irregular notification mode (warning display) is satisfied during a certain fluctuation period, the notification is not started during the fluctuation period and is continuously executed. It is preferable that the notification is performed at the start of the next symbol change and the effect lottery mode is changed. Even if the conditions for executing the irregular notification mode are satisfied, the detection of launch at an appropriate launch position (reception of various incoming ball signals, etc.) until the next fluctuation starts. Alternatively, it is conceivable to update the execution condition of the warning display to the non-satisfied state by timing the timer provided appropriately such as the transition to the demo screen.

<Other changes>
In this example, the jackpot start demo command transmitted at the start of the jackpot (small hit) may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot (small hit) symbol, and the period during which the notification image is displayed may be the jackpot (small hit). Hit) It can also be changed depending on the design. In this configuration, the sub-main sends a command to the sub-sub to execute the effect even at the start of the big hit corresponding to the received big hit start command, but the command related to the firing position (notification image display command). Of these, the information for selecting the display type (the part (B) shown in FIG. 84) is shared, and the first broadcast image is configured so that the displayed mode is almost the same (the displayed object is). Although they are the same, they may be different in position, size, timing, etc.).

Further, it is preferable that the warning notification display (for example, the fifth notification image) has a more positive mode (display in the large display area SG10) than the normal guidance notification (for example, the second notification image). However, in addition, when the warning display is executed, the effect can be replaced (change of the lottery table and the result). That is, when the importance of the notification is higher (warning notification), the notification to the player may be prioritized with the effect as a passive mode.

It should be noted that even when the reach effect is developed during the time-reduced gaming state, information that can identify the reserved number is separately displayed in the corner area of the effect display device SG (for example, separately from the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13). , The number of holdings on the first main game side and the number of holdings on the second main game side are always displayed in numbers near the display area of the fourth notification image), for example, a time-saving game. Even if the second notification image (right-handed) in the state must be erased by an effect or the like, the display of the separate distribution (for example, the fourth notification image) and the display of the number of pending numbers are always displayed. , The player can determine whether the situation is such that the hold should be increased or the launch of the game ball is stopped.

In addition, when the premier notice (big hit confirmation notification) is configured to be executable, for example, when the premier notice is executed in a normal game state (a game state in which a left-handed recommendation is recommended such as a non-time shortened game state), the first 5 Even if the requirement for warning notification (left-handed notification) related to the notification image, etc. is satisfied, it is confirmed that the game state will shift to the right-handed recommended gaming state. (For example, until the symbol change related to the premier notice is stopped) may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, for example, when the big winning opening such as during the first round or the small hit in the big hit of 7 rounds (the number of rounds with balls 6) related to the big hit symbol "9A" in the second embodiment is opened by a short opening. , 2nd main game start port in the situation where the opening extension function is not activated Even if the left-handed hit is detected when the right-handed game is not practically advantageous, such as during the operation of the electric accessory, the 1st main game starts. Since there is a merit such as being able to acquire a jackpot lottery right associated with entering the game starting port, it may be configured not to execute a warning notification. In this case, in the case of a 7-round jackpot, a warning may be given when a left-handed strike is detected after the second round. In addition, even when the game by hitting the left is detected and a warning notification is displayed during the time-reduced game state (when the game by right-handed is recommended), the non-time-reduced game state is satisfied. Among them, when the second main game start opening is opened by winning the auxiliary game symbol, the warning notification may not be executed even if the game by left-handed is detected.

Further, in this example, the launch instruction command is configured to be able to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side at various timings, but the configuration of the launch instruction command is, for example, the auxiliary game state on the auxiliary game side. It may be configured to generate a launch instruction command using the data related to the game time shortening game state (electric support state) or the auxiliary game non-time reduction game state (non-electric support state), or the loss symbol may be stopped. Occasionally, it may be configured so that transmission can be performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Further, not only the firing instruction command may be used at the display start timing of the notification image, but also the content of the firing instruction command may be referred to at the display end timing of the notification image.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (1) is
A plurality of entry openings (for example, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10) provided in the game area (for example, the game area D30) where the game ball can enter, and
The first firing intensity that enables the game ball to be launched toward the game area (for example, the game area D30) and the game ball to be released to the game area (for example, the game area D30), and higher than the first firing intensity. It is provided with a game ball launching unit (for example, launching device D42) having a large firing intensity and a second firing intensity that enables the game ball to be released into the game area, and at least a game ball launching unit (for example, a game area D30). The first flow-down route through which the game ball launched at the first firing intensity flows down and the second flow-down route through which the game ball launched at the second firing intensity flows down are formed.
Of the plurality of entry ports (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10), the ball is provided on the first flow-down route (in other words, it is fired at the first launch intensity). The game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and the game ball launched at the second firing strength cannot or is difficult to enter.) First entry port (for example, the first main game start) Mouth A10) and
Of the plurality of entry ports (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10), the ball is provided on the second flow-down route (in other words, is fired at the second firing intensity). The game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and the game ball launched at the first firing strength cannot or is difficult to enter.) Second entry port (for example, the second main game start) Mouth B10) and
It is equipped with a game information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) that can display and stop the identification information in a variable manner according to the progress of the game and can display the game information by superimposing the identification information on the identification information.
It is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state.
In the case of a specific game state, the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball at the second firing intensity. The broadcast image includes a first broadcast image that occupies a predetermined display area and a second broadcast image that occupies a smaller display area than the first broadcast image.
The first notification image is displayed when the specific gaming state is satisfied and the predetermined display condition is satisfied, while the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition when the specific gaming state is satisfied. It is configured to be displayed as
During at least a part of the period during which the identification information is variablely displayed, the display priority order on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is the first notification image, the second notification image, and the like. While the order of the identification information is, the display priority order on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is second during at least a part of the period during which the identification information is stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured in the order of a notification image, identification information, and a first notification image.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (2) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of variable display and stop display of the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of variable display and stop display of the second identification information, and
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10).
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. The first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) that temporarily stores random numbers and controls the occurrence of the first hold, and the variable display start of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold. When the conditions are satisfied, the first identification information is displayed in a random number on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) after the first hold is exhausted, and then the stop identification information is displayed. The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10).
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) that temporarily stores a random number and controls the occurrence of a second hold, and
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second hold is digested and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is used. A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed.
The stop identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) or the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped and displayed. When the stop identification information is the first stop mode or the second stop mode different from the first stop mode, the special game control means (for example, the special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. If the special game is not executed and the first identification information and the second identification information are not variablely displayed, and if the second hold exists, the variable display of the first identification information is started. While the condition is not satisfied, it is configured so that the variable display start condition of the second identification information can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold exists, and the special game related to the first stop mode is executed. It is configured so that the case where the special game according to the second stop mode is executed can be more advantageous to the player than the case where it is performed.
When a certain first hold newly occurs, the hold information regarding the first random number related to the first hold before satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the first hold. Can be transmitted to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S), and when a certain second hold newly occurs, the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied. Also, before, the hold information related to the second random number related to the second hold can be transmitted to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
The variable unit is from the time when the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner to the time when the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
If the first condition including at least the existence of a predetermined number of undigested second holds is satisfied, during the period until the number of repetitions of the variable unit reaches the predetermined number, during the period. The second stop mode can be stopped and displayed, but the effect that the first stop mode is not stopped and displayed during the period can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). And
When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second stop mode may be displayed as stopped during the period until the number of repetitions of the variable unit reaches a specific number. On the other hand, during the period, the effect that the first stop mode is not stopped and displayed can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), and the specific number is larger than the predetermined number. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so that it can be increased.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A1) is
The game ball flowing down on the second region side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the first region side, and the starting port (for example, the first) on which the game ball can enter is arranged. 2 main game start port B10), an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g), and
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). When,
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is provided.
As the game state, it is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state.
When the game state is switched, the special game is started, or the special game is finished, the information display unit (for example, the information display unit (for example)) can notify the game ball to be fired toward the second region side. It is possible to display for a predetermined time on the effect display device SG).
When the game state is switched, the special game is started, or the special game is finished, the information display unit (for example, the information display unit B) can notify the game ball to be fired toward the first region side. It can be displayed on the effect display device SG), and when the notification image B is displayed, the notification image B is continued until the game state is switched again, the special game starts, or the special game ends. It is configured to be able to display
When the game state is switched, the special game is started, or the special game is finished, the information display unit (for example, the information display unit C) can notify the game ball to be fired toward the second region side. It can be displayed on the effect display device SG), and when the notification image C is displayed, the notification image C is continued until the game state is switched again, the special game starts, or the special game ends. It is configured to be able to display
The display area occupied by the notification image A is larger than the display area occupied by the notification image B, and the display area occupied by the notification image A is configured to be larger than the display area occupied by the notification image C. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A2) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A first speaker (for example, speaker left D24L) provided at a position closer to the first region than the second region, capable of outputting audio, and
A second speaker (for example, speaker right D24R) that can output audio and is provided closer to the second area than the first area, and
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
As the game state, it is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the ball entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state.
In the case of a specific game state, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side. The broadcast image includes a first broadcast image that occupies a predetermined display area and a second broadcast image that occupies a smaller display area than the first broadcast image.
The first notification image is displayed when the specific gaming state is satisfied and the predetermined display condition is satisfied, while the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition when the specific gaming state is satisfied. It is configured to be displayed as
When the second broadcast image is displayed, the sound can be output only from the second speaker (for example, the speaker right D24R), while when the first broadcast image is displayed, the first speaker (for example, the speaker left D24L) can be output. ) And the second speaker (for example, the speaker right D24R), the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be configured to output sound from both the speaker and the second speaker (for example, the speaker right D24R).

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A3) is
The game ball flowing down on the second region side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the first region side, and the starting port (for example, the first) on which the game ball can enter is arranged. 2 Main game start port B10) and
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state, in which the game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first area side ( For example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20),
An identification information display unit that can display identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20)? A special game capable of executing a unit game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses. Equipped with control means
As the game state, it is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state.
During the execution of the special game, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image that can notify the game ball to be fired toward the second region side.
As the display mode of the broadcast image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode which is a display mode different from the first mode.
When the notification image is started to be displayed during the execution of the special game, the display mode of the notification image is displayed in the first mode, and when the notification image is displayed in the first mode, the predetermined number. It is characterized in that the notification image is displayed in the second mode when the ball is entered into a variable winning opening less than or equal to (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20). It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A4) is
The game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the game ball than the game ball flowing down the first area side, and the main game start port (for example,) where the game ball can enter. , 2nd main game start port B10),
A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the game is displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port can be entered. (For example, with a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball (for example, the second main game start port B10) as compared with the state in which the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
An auxiliary game start port (for example,) in which the game ball flowing down on the second region side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the first region side, and the game ball can enter the ball. , Auxiliary game start port H10),
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying main game identification information, and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
Auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10).
When the main game random number is acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the acquired main game random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the main game identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the main game hold occurs. Main game Random number temporary storage means and
When the variable display start condition of the main game identification information related to a certain main game hold is satisfied, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the main game random number related to the certain main game hold. The main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the main game identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit B21g).
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the special game control means and the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) can execute a special game advantageous to the player. It is provided with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying information to be executed to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S).
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring auxiliary game random numbers triggered by the entry of a game ball into an auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10).
When the auxiliary game random number is acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, the acquired auxiliary game random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the auxiliary identification information is satisfied, and the auxiliary game is controlled to be held. Game random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the auxiliary game identification information related to a certain auxiliary game hold is satisfied, the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit) is determined according to the decision content based on the auxiliary game random number related to the certain auxiliary game hold. Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information after the auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed in H21g).
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, within the displacement drive period, which is the period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. After the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, an easy-entry ball game is executed in which the operation of displacing the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is performed once or a plurality of times. Equipped with easy-to-enter ball game decision execution means,
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side,
It is provided with an information display content control means for controlling the information display content to be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side, and the notification image can be displayed in the first aspect and the first aspect. It has at least a second aspect, which is a display aspect different from the first aspect, and has.
When displaying the broadcast image, it is configured so that it can be determined in which display mode the first mode or the second mode the broadcast image is displayed based on the number of main game hold or the number of auxiliary game hold. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A5) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, General winning opening P10) and
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
As the game state, it is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the ball into the ball entry slot (for example, the general winning slot P10) than in the normal game state.
In the case of a specific game state, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side.
The broadcast image is characterized by including an image of a figure consisting of a combination of at least two or more easily distinguishable colors or an image of a character string consisting of a combination of at least two or more easily distinguishable colors. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A6) is
The game ball flowing down on the second region side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the first region side, and the starting port (for example, the first) on which the game ball can enter is arranged. 2 Main game start port B10) and
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state, in which the game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first area side ( For example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20),
An identification information display unit that can display identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20)? A special game capable of executing a unit game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses. Equipped with control means
During the execution of the special game, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image that can notify the game ball to be fired toward the second region side.
As the display mode of the broadcast image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode which is a display mode different from the first mode.
When the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20) is less than the specified number, which is less than the predetermined number, during the execution of a certain unit game. In the case where the notification image is displayed at the time of executing the unit game which is the next execution time of the certain unit game, the display mode of the notification image is the first mode.
If the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20) is equal to or greater than the specified number during the execution of a certain unit game, the certain unit game is performed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the notification image when the notification image is displayed at the time of executing the unit game to be the next execution time is configured to be the second aspect.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A7) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A launch handle (for example, launch handle D44) that can adjust the launch intensity of the game ball,
A handle operation detector capable of detecting an operation on the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44),
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
The information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side.
As the state related to the progress of the game, there are at least a state in which the game is in progress and a state in which the game is in progress, and a state in which the game is not progressing.
In the standby state, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to display predetermined information that is not displayed in the gaming state.
The notification image is not displayed when the handle operation detection unit detects an operation on the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44) during the game, while the handle operation detecting unit performs the firing handle (for example) in the standby state. , The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that a notification image can be displayed when an operation on the firing handle D44) is detected.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A8) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, General winning opening P10) and
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying information.
The information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side.
As the state related to the progress of the game, there are at least a state in which the game is in progress and a state in which the game is in progress, and a state in which the game is not progressing.
In the standby state, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to display predetermined information that is not displayed in the gaming state.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the broadcast image has a higher display priority than the predetermined information and is configured so that the broadcast image can be displayed even while the predetermined information is being displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A9) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
It is provided with an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information and a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG). ,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched on the first region side or the second region side.
It is provided with a game information transmission means for transmitting the generated recommended launch information to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
Based on the recommended launch information received by the game information receiving means, the first notification image and the game ball, which are game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side, are launched toward the second region side. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a second notification image, which is game information that can be notified so as to be displayed, can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A10) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched on the first region side or the second region side.
It is provided with a game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated recommended launch information and information on the game state to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information and information on the state of the game transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
The first notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side, and the second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side. Can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is configured to transmit recommended firing information and information regarding the game state to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) side when the power is turned off and restored. ,
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) makes a first notification based on the recommended launch information received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) and the information regarding the state of the game when the power is turned off and restored. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to determine whether or not to display an image and whether or not to display a second notification image.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A11) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate the main game recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched on the first region side or the second region side.
The main game recommended launch information is the first main game recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side, and the information on whether the game ball should be launched on the second region side. It has at least the recommended launch information for the second main game,
It is provided with a game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated main game recommended launch information and information on the state of the game to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving the main game recommended launch information and information regarding the state of the game transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
Based on the information on the state of the game received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the sub-game recommendation is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side or the second region side. Fire information is generated and memorable,
The secondary game recommended launch information includes the first secondary game recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side, and information on whether the game ball should be launched on the second region side. It has at least the second secondary game recommended launch information,
The first notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side, and the second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side. Can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the first sub-game recommended launch information, the storage is concerned. It is configured to be able to display the first notification image based on the recommended launch information of the first sub-game.
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the reception thereof. It is configured to be able to display the first notification image based on the recommended launch information of the first main game.
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the second sub-game recommended launch information, the storage is concerned. It is configured to be able to display the second notification image based on the second secondary game recommended launch information.
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the first sub-game recommended launch information, the reception thereof. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to display a second notification image based on the second main game recommended launch information.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A12) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate the main game recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched on the first region side or the second region side.
The main game recommended launch information is the first main game recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side, and the information on whether the game ball should be launched on the second region side. It has at least the recommended launch information for the second main game,
It is provided with a game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated main game recommended launch information and information on the state of the game to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving the main game recommended launch information and information regarding the state of the game transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
Based on the information on the state of the game received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the sub-game recommendation is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side or the second region side. Fire information is generated and memorable,
The secondary game recommended launch information includes the first secondary game recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side, and information on whether the game ball should be launched on the second region side. It has at least the second secondary game recommended launch information,
The first notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side, and the second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side. Can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the first sub-game recommended launch information, the storage is concerned. It is configured to be able to display the first notification image based on the recommended launch information of the first sub-game.
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the second sub-game recommended launch information, the first It is configured to hide the notification image and the second notification image.
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the second sub-game recommended launch information, the storage is concerned. It is configured to be able to display the second notification image based on the second secondary game recommended launch information.
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and the stored sub-game recommended launch information is the first sub-game recommended launch information, the first It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to hide the notification image and the second notification image.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A13) is
The game ball flowing down the first area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second area side, and the first ball entry port (where the game ball can enter) For example, the first main game start port A10) and
The game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the game ball than the game ball flowing down the first area side, and the second ball entry port (where the game ball can enter) For example, the general winning opening P10) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Entering the first entry port (for example, the general winning opening P10) and the first entry opening information, which is information regarding the fact that the ball has entered the first entry opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10). It is provided with a game information transmitting means for transmitting the second ball entrance information, which is information on the fact that the ball has been hit, and the information on the game state to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S).
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving the first ball entrance information, the second ball entry information, and the game status information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is provided.
Recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball to the first region side or the second region side based on the information regarding the state of the game received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M). Can be generated and memorized,
As recommended launch information, the first recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch a game ball on the first region side, and the second recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch a game ball on the second region side. Have at least information and
When the recommended launch information stored in the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is the first recommended launch information, the second entry port entry information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M). Is received and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) displays the first notification image which is the game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side. It is configured to be displayed in
When the recommended launch information stored in the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is the second recommended launch information, the first ball entry port entry information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) Is received and when a specific condition is satisfied, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) displays the second notification image, which is the game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the second region side. It is configured to be displayed in
When the first notification image is displayed, the first ball entry port entry information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), a predetermined time has elapsed since the first notification image was displayed. Or, by receiving information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that the state of the game has changed as information on the state of the game, the display of the first notification image is erased. ,
When the second notification image is displayed, the second entry port entry information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M), for which a specific time has elapsed since the second notification image was displayed. Or, by receiving information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that the state of the game has changed as information on the state of the game, the display of the second notification image is erased. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A14) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an entrance ball into which the game ball can enter (for example, 2nd main game start port B10) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A game information transmitting means for transmitting information about a game state to a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) is provided.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) includes a game information receiving means for receiving information regarding the state of the game transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side.
Information on the state of the game can be output to the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
Based on the information on the state of the game, the recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side or the second region side, is output to the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is possible and
When the information on the game status and the recommended launch information are output to the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the information on the game status and the recommended launch information are configured to be output as one command. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being there.

MN11ta-A 1st main game win / fail lottery table, MN11-B 2nd main game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-B 2nd main game win / fail lottery table, MN11-H Auxiliary game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win / fail lottery Table, MN20 special game transition determination means MN41ta-A first main game stop symbol determination lottery table, MN41-B second main game stop symbol determination means MN41ta-B second main game stop symbol determination lottery table, MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table, MN50 variation mode determination means MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-B 2 Main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MP11t-C 1st and 2nd Main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP33c winning ball counter, MP34t special game timer MP51c probability change number counter, MP52c time reduction number counter MP61c 1st start port entry rate counter , MP62c General winning opening entrance rate counter MP70c Round winning number counter, MP90t Standby demo timer MP21t First start opening confirmation timer, MP22t General winning opening confirmation timer MP81t Right-handed monitoring timer, MP82t Left-handed monitoring timer MT Information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game Symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit,
C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric accessory C20 2nd big winning opening, C21s 2nd big winning opening Winning detection device C21d 2nd big winning opening Electric accessory, C22 Specific area C22s Specific area entry detection device, C22c Specific area shielding member H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entry detection device, H10-1 (-2) Auxiliary game start port H11-1 (-2) s Auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit P10 General Winning slot, P11s General winning slot entry ball detection device S Sub-control board, SM21ta Lottery table for determining the content of fluctuations in the design of the design Display unit SG13 2nd hold display unit RTC real-time clock, D24 speaker D26 game effect lamp, D44 launch handle D38 center decoration, HS launch instruction display unit HSL left-handed display unit, HSR right-handed display unit D24L speaker left, D24R speaker right MN52c -1 Limited frequency A counter, MN52c-2 Limited frequency B counter KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting port located in a predetermined game area and
A game ball that flows down on the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down on the first area side.
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
Information display unit that can display information and
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the information display on the information display unit.
The main game club
When the ball enters the starting port, the special symbol change display is executed on the special symbol display device.
A special game can be executed when the special symbol of a predetermined mode is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device.
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information on whether to launch the game ball on the first region side or the second region side, and send it to the sub-game unit.
The sub-game club
Equipped with a game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the recommended launch information received by the game information receiving means, the first notification image and the game ball, which are game information that can be notified to launch the game ball toward the first region side, are launched toward the second region side. It is configured to be controllable so that the information display unit displays the second notification image, which is the game information that can be notified.
The main game unit recommends firing at least once after the variable display of 1 special symbol is started and before the variable display of the special symbol performed after the variable display of 1 special symbol is started. Generate information and send it to the sub-game department
The recommended launch information is composed of a combination of two command data, and one of the two command data is configured to be generated using flag data indicating a predetermined game state.
The flag data is configured to be operating data when a predetermined game state has occurred.
The pachinko game is characterized in that the sub-game unit can be controlled to display the second notification image on the information display unit when the recommended launch information, which is the operation data of the flag data, is received. Machine.

Images